# SlickCell > Repair shop software and POS for electronics repair and retail shops: repair tickets, a till, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, the VAT margin scheme, trade-ins, staff rotas and supplier ordering in one system, hosted in London. SlickCell (slickcell.com) is web-based repair shop software for shops that repair, buy and sell electronics: phones, tablets, laptops and desktops, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones. It is priced in pounds, built around UK VAT including the second-hand margin scheme, and its database is hosted in London. It runs in any modern browser on a computer, tablet or phone, with nothing to install. The name is said "Slick Sell", and people also search for it as Slicksell or Slick Cell. SlickCell is not connected with Slickcall, the international calling app. ## At a glance - Web app for repair shops: repair tickets, POS, invoices, parts and device stock, trade-ins, purchase orders, supplier network, staff, reports. - Every device tracked as its own unit with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition and margin. - An AI summary of your reports in plain English, next to the figures it is drawn from. - UK VAT built in, including the second-hand margin scheme; tax rules are configurable for any country. - Database hosted in London on every plan. - From £39/month excluding VAT. Every feature on every plan. - 14-day free trial, started online: no card, no sales call. Sign up: https://slickcell.com/pricing ## Why shops choose SlickCell - **Every device is its own record**: One phone is one unit with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition, battery health, selling price, supplier and history. Quantity is counted from the units, never typed, so you see the exact profit on the exact phone you sold. (https://slickcell.com/features/inventory) - **The VAT margin scheme, per item**: Second-hand stock can be taxed on the margin between what you paid for that unit and what you sold it for, reported separately from standard-rated sales. Because every device carries its own purchase cost, the per-item record the margin scheme asks for is already there. (https://slickcell.com/features/used-devices) - **Repairs where the money adds up**: A deposit is taken against the job, parts are committed from stock, extra work is quoted before the price changes, a part payment leaves a real balance, and a paid invoice is locked. The ticket, the till, the invoice and the report all agree. (https://slickcell.com/features/repairs) - **Trade-ins as a tracked purchase**: Inspect, approve, pay the seller by cash, bank transfer or credit against a sale, and the device enters stock as its own unit with its real acquisition cost. (https://slickcell.com/features/buyback) - **Customers kept up to date by text, email and QR**: Text or email a customer from the job on a template. Every receipt and repair label carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. (https://slickcell.com/features/customer-tracking) - **Any staff phone is a barcode scanner**: Pair a phone to the till from a QR code on screen and every scan lands in the open sale. No app, no hardware to buy. (https://slickcell.com/features/mobile-scanning) - **Suppliers connected inside the system**: A purchase order lands directly in a connected supplier's own account; they confirm or re-quote, reserve and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived. (https://slickcell.com/features/supplier-network) - **Hosted in London, sealed per shop**: The database runs in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, with row-level security on every table, two-factor sign-in, database-enforced roles and an append-only audit trail. (https://slickcell.com/security) - **Every feature on every plan**: From £39 a month excluding VAT, in pounds, with a fourteen-day free trial you start yourself: no card and no sales call. No per-transaction fees, and you keep the card machine you already have. (https://slickcell.com/pricing) ## Plans - Starter: £39/month or £390/year, excluding VAT. One location, everything you need to open up and trade. - Professional: £59/month or £590/year, excluding VAT. Multiple locations, discount rules and priority processing. - Supplier Pro: £99/month or £990/year, excluding VAT. Adds Supplier Operations: sell to other shops from your own catalogue. - Enterprise: price on application. Tailored to your organisation. Pricing that scales with the shop. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. Start the trial yourself: no sales call, no card, and nobody has to ring you back before you can look at it. Full detail: https://slickcell.com/pricing ## Security - **Hosted in London, on every plan**: Your shop's database runs in a London data centre. That is the same on Starter as on Enterprise: UK data residency is not an upgrade you have to ask for. - **Encrypted in transit and at rest**: Every connection to SlickCell is encrypted with TLS, and the database is encrypted at rest with AES-256. That covers the app, the till, the phone scanner and the customer tracking page. - **Every shop sealed off from every other**: Row-level security is switched on for every table in the database. Each query is checked against the shop you belong to by the database itself, so another shop's records cannot be reached from the app, from the API or by a changed link. The rule is covered by automated database tests. - **Roles enforced by the database**: Owner, manager, technician, sales and accountant each see and change only what the role allows. The rule lives in the database, not just in hidden buttons, so a permission cannot be sidestepped from outside the screen. - **Money-moving actions limited**: Voids and write-offs are limited to owners and managers. Editing a sold unit or handing a device over unpaid asks for a reason, and the reason is kept with the record. - **Two-factor sign-in**: Every account can add an authenticator app, so a stolen password alone does not open the shop. Switching it off needs both the password and a current code. - **Customer unlock codes kept apart**: Device passcodes are stored separately from the customer record and are revealed only to the roles that work on the device. Every reveal is logged with who looked and when. - **Automatic sign-out**: A till left open signs itself out after the period of inactivity you choose, with a warning first. - **Append-only audit trail**: Changes to repairs, stock, customers, invoices and payments are written to an audit trail with who made them and when. Entries are added, never edited, and only owners and managers can read them. - **Paid invoices cannot be rewritten**: Once an invoice is settled it is locked. A refund or correction is a new entry that points at the original, so the history your accountant reads is the history that happened. - **Deleted records can be restored**: Deleting a record moves it to the bin first, where it can be brought back. Nothing important disappears because of one wrong click. - **Export whenever you like**: Repairs, stock, payments, profit and loss, tax and payroll reports export to CSV at any time, from the screen you are already on. Your records are yours to take to your accountant, or anywhere else. - **We never store a card number**: Your subscription is paid on the secure pages of a PCI DSS Level 1 payment provider. At the till, card takings are recorded by amount and method on the sale, so no customer card data ever passes through SlickCell. - **Monitored around the clock**: Errors in the app and on the server are reported to us the moment they happen, with customer personal data stripped out before the report is sent. Full detail: https://slickcell.com/security ## Modules - [Repairs](https://slickcell.com/features/repairs): Repair detail spread across paper, WhatsApp and memory. - [POS & Sales](https://slickcell.com/features/pos): A till that was never built for repairs or used devices. - [Invoicing & payments](https://slickcell.com/features/invoicing): Part payments treated as paid, or absorbed as discount. - [Customers](https://slickcell.com/features/customers): No history when a customer returns with the same device. - [Customer updates](https://slickcell.com/features/customer-tracking): Ringing round to say a repair is ready. - [Reviews](https://slickcell.com/features/customer-tracking): No idea which jobs left the customer happy. - [Inventory & device units](https://slickcell.com/features/inventory): Stock that does not match what is actually on the shelf. - [Used devices & margin tax](https://slickcell.com/features/used-devices): Second-hand VAT worked out by hand, job by job. - [Trade-in & buyback](https://slickcell.com/features/buyback): Trade-ins settled off the books and never reconciled. - [Mobile scanning](https://slickcell.com/features/mobile-scanning): A scanner for every till, or no scanner at all. - [Purchase orders & receiving](https://slickcell.com/features/procurement): Supplier orders living in messages and spreadsheets. - [Returns to supplier](https://slickcell.com/help/returns-and-faulty-items): Faulty stock going back on the shelf because nowhere else holds it. - [Supplier network](https://slickcell.com/features/supplier-network): Re-keying the same order into a supplier's system by hand. - [Reports & tax](https://slickcell.com/features/reports): The invoice and the report showing different totals. - [Workforce](https://slickcell.com/features/workforce): Staff access too broad, and hours kept on a wall chart. - [Multi-branch](https://slickcell.com/features/multi-branch): Each branch keeping its own numbers, in its own way. - [Cash drawer](https://slickcell.com/features/cash-control): The drawer and the day's takings never quite agreeing. - [Stocktake](https://slickcell.com/help/run-a-stocktake): A count that overwrites the system with whatever was typed. ## Compared with other repair shop software - [Best repair shop software UK](https://slickcell.com/compare/best-repair-shop-software-uk): Eight systems UK repair shops meet in search, in alphabetical order, compared on what each says it is, its published price, how its trial starts and where its data is held. Every fact sourced and dated. - [SlickCell vs RepairDesk](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-repairdesk): £39 a month in pounds with every feature included, against US-dollar per-store pricing with add-ons marked paid on the entry plan; a trial you start yourself against a Request a Demo form; a database hosted in London. - [SlickCell vs RepairShopr](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-repairshopr): £39 a month in pounds with no monthly ticket limit and three users, against a US-dollar Starter plan limited to 75 tickets and invoices a month and one user; a database hosted in London. - [SlickCell vs Orderry](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-orderry): £39 a month in pounds with VAT stated, against US-dollar pricing from $69 a month excluding sales tax; a database hosted in London, against data stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa, per Orderry's privacy policy. - [SlickCell vs XEPOS](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-xepos): Repair shop software built around the ticket and the device, against a general EPOS till sold for phone stores on a 12-month support package; keep your own card machine, against XEPOS's own terminals. ## Common questions **What is SlickCell?** SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: phones, tablets, laptops, games consoles and smartwatches. It runs repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins, supplier ordering, staff rotas and reports in one web app, hosted in London. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Is SlickCell a good choice for a new phone repair shop in the UK?** Yes. It is priced in pounds from £39 a month, handles UK VAT including the margin scheme on second-hand phones, keeps its data in London, and tracks every device you buy or trade in as its own unit with its own cost. You can start the trial yourself tonight, with no card and no sales call. **Is SlickCell free?** Free for the first 14 days, with every feature and no card. After that, Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. When the trial ends you choose how to pay, or you stop. There is nothing to cancel. **Is there open-source repair shop software?** Yes. There are open-source repair systems you can install on your own server. The licence is free; the hosting, backups, security updates and support are yours to arrange. SlickCell is hosted for you in London, runs in any browser and has nothing to install. **What happens when the trial ends?** You choose a plan and add a way to pay, or you stop. Nothing is charged during the 14 days and there is nothing to cancel. Your shop, stock and repairs stay as you left them when you carry on. **Can I see it before I sign up?** Yes. Book a demo and we walk through your own workflow on the real screens, or start the trial and put a real repair through it. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **Where is SlickCell data hosted, and is it secure?** In London, on every plan. The database is encrypted in transit and at rest, every shop is sealed off by row-level security on every table, staff roles are enforced by the database, two-factor sign-in is available on every account, and changes are written to an append-only audit trail. **How do customers get repair updates?** By text or email from the job, on templates each shop can edit. Every receipt and repair label also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. **What is computer repair shop software?** It is the system a computer repair shop runs the job and the counter on: booking a machine in by serial, recording the diagnosis, sending a quote, ordering the part, tracking the repair status and taking payment. In SlickCell those steps sit on one ticket, with stock and the till in the same web app. **What is an EPOS system?** EPOS means electronic point of sale: the till, plus the stock and sales records behind it. In SlickCell the till, stock by serial or IMEI, accessories by quantity, trade-ins, the cash drawer and the reports are one system, so a sale moves the stock and the figures in the same step. **Can I order parts from my supplier inside SlickCell?** Yes, when your supplier is connected. Your purchase order lands in the supplier's own account, they confirm or re-quote and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived without retyping it. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create the account, choose a plan and use every feature for 14 days without entering card details. You add a card only if you decide to stay. **Can I export all my data?** Yes, at any time. Repairs, stock, payments, profit and loss, tax and payroll reports export to CSV from the screen they are on, so your records go with you. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **Does SlickCell run on an iPad?** Yes. SlickCell is web-based and runs in any modern browser on a computer, tablet or phone, so there is nothing to install on the iPad. Sign in at the counter and the same shop, repair queue and till are there as on any other device. **What hardware do I need?** A computer, tablet or phone with a modern browser. Receipts, A4 invoices, repair tickets and shelf labels print from one template on a thermal or A4 printer, any staff phone can scan barcodes into the sale, and card payments go through the card machine you already have. **Can SlickCell open my cash drawer?** A drawer that connects to your receipt printer opens when the printer's own driver is set to open it on print; SlickCell keeps the float, the cash in and out and the count at close. **How do I get my figures to my accountant?** Export them. Profit and loss, VAT including the margin scheme, payments, the account ledger, stock and payroll export to CSV from the report you are reading. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **Which companies process my shop's data?** Your shop's database is hosted in London on every plan. The full list of the service providers that process data for SlickCell, with what each one does and where, comes with our data processing agreement, which any customer can ask for at hello@slickcell.com. Customers are given 30 days' notice before a provider is added or changed. ## Industries - [All industries](https://slickcell.com/for) - [For phone repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/phone-repair-shops) - [For computer repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/computer-repair-shops) - [For desktop repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/desktop-repair-shops) - [For tablet repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/tablet-repair-shops) - [For games console repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/console-repair-shops) - [For smartwatch repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/smartwatch-repair-shops) - [For earbud and headphone repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/earbuds-headphones-repair-shops) - [For electronics repair shops](https://slickcell.com/for/electronics-repair-shops) - [For phone shops](https://slickcell.com/for/phone-shops) - [For electronics shops](https://slickcell.com/for/electronics-shops) - [For suppliers](https://slickcell.com/for/suppliers) ## Feature pages - [Repairs](https://slickcell.com/features/repairs) - [POS & sales](https://slickcell.com/features/pos) - [Invoicing & payments](https://slickcell.com/features/invoicing) - [Inventory & device units](https://slickcell.com/features/inventory) - [Used devices & the margin scheme](https://slickcell.com/features/used-devices) - [Trade-in & buyback](https://slickcell.com/features/buyback) - [Customers](https://slickcell.com/features/customers) - [Customer tracking & reviews](https://slickcell.com/features/customer-tracking) - [Phone as a barcode scanner](https://slickcell.com/features/mobile-scanning) - [Purchase orders & receiving](https://slickcell.com/features/procurement) - [Supplier network](https://slickcell.com/features/supplier-network) - [Reports & tax](https://slickcell.com/features/reports) - [Cash drawer & cashbook](https://slickcell.com/features/cash-control) - [Workforce](https://slickcell.com/features/workforce) - [Multi-branch](https://slickcell.com/features/multi-branch) ## Buying and switching - [Pricing](https://slickcell.com/pricing) - [Free repair shop software, and the no-card trial](https://slickcell.com/free-repair-shop-software) - [Security](https://slickcell.com/security) - [Integrations](https://slickcell.com/integrations) - [Hardware: scanners, printers, labels and drawers](https://slickcell.com/hardware) - [Moving from another system](https://slickcell.com/migration) - [About](https://slickcell.com/about) - [Partner programme](https://slickcell.com/partners) - [Extended trial, for a review and real feedback](https://slickcell.com/trial-extension) - [VAT margin scheme calculator (free)](https://slickcell.com/tools/vat-margin-calculator) - [Best repair shop software UK: eight systems compared](https://slickcell.com/compare/best-repair-shop-software-uk) - [SlickCell vs RepairDesk](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-repairdesk) - [SlickCell vs RepairShopr](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-repairshopr) - [SlickCell vs Orderry](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-orderry) - [SlickCell vs XEPOS](https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-xepos) - [Book a demo](https://slickcell.com/demo) - [Contact](https://slickcell.com/contact) ## Guides - [VAT on second hand goods: what a shop owes](https://slickcell.com/blog/vat-on-second-hand-goods): VAT on second hand goods for UK shops: when the full price is taxed, when only the margin is, and the records that decide which. Sourced to gov.uk. - [Margin scheme VAT invoice: what it must show](https://slickcell.com/blog/margin-scheme-vat-invoice): A margin scheme VAT invoice shows the total and never the VAT. What goes on it, what must stay off it, and an example for a used phone. Sourced to gov.uk. - [How to calculate margin scheme VAT: 4 examples](https://slickcell.com/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat): How to calculate margin scheme VAT, with four worked examples for used devices: a normal sale, a repaired unit, a loss and a VAT-paid purchase. - [Is there VAT on refurbished phones? (UK shops)](https://slickcell.com/blog/vat-on-refurbished-phones): Is there VAT on refurbished phones? For a VAT-registered shop, yes: on the full price or only the margin, depending on how the phone was bought. Sourced. - [When does the margin scheme apply? A check](https://slickcell.com/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply): When does the margin scheme apply to a second-hand item? The conditions from gov.uk as a checklist a shop can run on each device before it sells. - [How to start a phone repair business in the UK](https://slickcell.com/blog/how-to-start-a-phone-repair-business): How to start a phone repair business in the UK: what to repair, where to trade, Companies House and HMRC, parts, pricing and first customers. - [“Where is my phone?” The call you can stop taking](https://slickcell.com/blog/where-is-my-phone): The commonest question a repair shop is asked has the same answer every time, and a person has to find it first. It does not have to be a person. - [Ordering from a supplier who is already in the system](https://slickcell.com/blog/ordering-from-a-connected-supplier): Every purchase order gets typed twice: once by you, once by them. Everything that goes wrong afterwards starts with that second typing. - [Your staff already carry a barcode scanner](https://slickcell.com/blog/staff-already-carry-a-scanner): The second till never gets a scanner, because a scanner is eighty pounds you have not spent. Everyone behind the counter is already holding one. - [Who is allowed to give a discount?](https://slickcell.com/blog/who-can-give-a-discount): Most shops answer that question with trust. Trust is not a control, and the difference shows up in the month's margin, not on the day it happens. - [Counting stock without closing the shop](https://slickcell.com/blog/counting-stock-without-closing): A stocktake fails for boring reasons: it takes a day you don't have, and the till keeps selling while you count. Both are solvable. - [VAT margin scheme for used devices: how it works](https://slickcell.com/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices): A SlickCell guide to the VAT margin scheme on used phones, laptops and consoles: one sixth of the margin, a worked example, the records needed. - [Why stock by IMEI or serial beats a quantity count](https://slickcell.com/blog/imei-level-stock): Tracking each handset as its own record changes what you can see, sell and trust on the shelf, and it is the only way per-item margin VAT ever adds up. - [Purchase orders, receiving, and the gap in between](https://slickcell.com/blog/purchase-orders-and-receiving): Why booking stock in against the order you raised is what stops a short delivery quietly becoming your problem, and your loss. ## Help centre 25 step-by-step articles on the real screens: https://slickcell.com/help - [Add a device to stock](https://slickcell.com/help/add-a-device-unit-by-imei) - [Answer an order from a shop](https://slickcell.com/help/answer-an-incoming-order) - [Set your account up as a supplier](https://slickcell.com/help/become-a-supplier) - [Book a repair in](https://slickcell.com/help/book-a-repair-in) - [Set your country, currency and tax rate](https://slickcell.com/help/country-currency-and-tax) - [Devices, parts and accessories are not the same thing](https://slickcell.com/help/devices-parts-and-accessories) - [Dispatch an order, and settle what follows](https://slickcell.com/help/dispatch-and-settle) - [Hand the device back](https://slickcell.com/help/hand-a-device-over) - [Invite staff and choose what they can do](https://slickcell.com/help/invite-staff-and-set-roles) - [Jump to any screen with ⌘K](https://slickcell.com/help/jump-to-any-screen) - [Read the profit and loss](https://slickcell.com/help/profit-and-loss-report) - [Quote an order, revise it, and convert it](https://slickcell.com/help/quote-revise-and-convert) - [Raise a purchase order](https://slickcell.com/help/raise-a-purchase-order) - [Read paid, due and change on an invoice](https://slickcell.com/help/read-paid-due-and-change-on-an-invoice) - [Receive stock against a purchase order](https://slickcell.com/help/receive-stock-against-a-purchase-order) - [Refund a sale, and say where the goods went](https://slickcell.com/help/refund-a-sale) - [Deal with returned and faulty stock](https://slickcell.com/help/returns-and-faulty-items) - [Ring up a sale](https://slickcell.com/help/ring-up-a-sale) - [What each role can do](https://slickcell.com/help/roles-and-what-they-can-do) - [Run a stocktake](https://slickcell.com/help/run-a-stocktake) - [Share a catalogue, and decide what buyers see](https://slickcell.com/help/share-your-wholesale-catalogue) - [Start a free trial](https://slickcell.com/help/start-a-free-trial) - [Take a deposit on a repair](https://slickcell.com/help/take-a-deposit) - [Set up tax the way your shop charges it](https://slickcell.com/help/tax-on-your-sales) - [Take a device in part-exchange](https://slickcell.com/help/trade-a-handset-in) ## Full reference Every page on this site in plain text: https://slickcell.com/llms-full.txt --- # SlickCell: every page, in full ## Home Source: https://slickcell.com #### Repair shop software and POS SlickCell is repair shop software for electronics repair and retail shops: phones, tablets, laptops, games consoles and smartwatches. Book repairs, sell at the till, track every device by IMEI or serial number, order from suppliers and keep staff rotas, all in one web app hosted in London. 14 days free. No card needed. ##### Where repair shops lose time and money None of these are the shop's fault. They are what happens when the till, the repair notebook and the stock sheet do not talk to each other. - A paid repair is edited later, and the bill no longer matches what was taken. - A customer underpays and the difference quietly disappears. - A device is sold without the right IMEI or serial number against it. - A part is used on a job but stock is never reduced. - The invoice and the report show different totals for the same week. - A supplier delivery does not match the order, and nobody catches it. ##### One repair, followed all the way through The same job from the counter to the ledger. Each step writes to the next, so nothing has to be re-entered and nothing changes silently. - **Repair booked**: Device, fault and customer captured against a ticket. - **Deposit taken**: Payment recorded against the job, balance tracked. - **Part reserved**: Stock is committed to the ticket, not just noted. - **Technician assigned**: The job joins a queue with an owner and a due time. - **Extra work quoted**: Added cost is quoted on the ticket before it reaches the bill. - **Final payment**: Balance settles across card, cash or store credit. - **Device handed over**: Handover closes the ticket and the stock movement. - **Invoice & warranty issued**: The document, the VAT and the report agree. Because those steps are joined, a part used reduces stock, the stock movement lands in cost of goods, and cost of goods lands in the profit and loss, and none of it can be changed silently. ##### What a general till does not do Built for shops that repair and sell electronics, where every device has its own IMEI or serial number and its own cost. ##### Purchase orders & receiving Raise a purchase order, receive stock against it in full or in part, and keep supplier bills and returns with the order that created them. ##### Device units by IMEI or serial Every device is its own record: specs, cost, condition and history tracked per unit. ##### VAT margin scheme Second-hand margin VAT handled correctly, so your returns add up first time. ##### Multi-branch & trade-in credits Run several shops from one login, see every branch in one report, and settle trade-ins as store credit. ##### Repair shop management software, module by module Repairs, point of sale, stock, invoices, suppliers, staff and reports share one set of records. Pick the part of the day you want to see. - **Repairs**: One ticket carries the device, the fault, the deposit, the parts committed to it and the handover. The money moves with the job because they are the same record. - **POS & sales**: Ring up a repair, an accessory by quantity and a device by its IMEI or serial number on the same sale, then settle it across more than one method. - **Invoicing**: Each payment is recorded against the invoice it settles, so the balance is derived rather than typed, and a refund never quietly reopens a bill that was paid. - **Device units**: A device is its own row with its own IMEI or serial number, condition, cost and price. Quantity is counted from the units on the shelf rather than typed into a box. - **Purchasing**: Receive against the order you raised. A short delivery is visible at the moment it is booked in, not when the bill arrives three weeks later. - **Reports & tax**: Revenue, profit and tax read from the same ledger the till writes to, and every figure can be opened to see the invoices underneath it. An AI summary reads your reports back in plain English, next to the figures it is drawn from. - **Workforce**: Roles decide who can discount, void, refund or see cost prices. Shifts, attendance and leave are recorded against each employee, and payroll prices the hours at the rate in force on each day. - **Suppliers**: Your purchase order arrives as their incoming order: not an email they retype. They confirm or re-quote, you approve line by line, and stock is reserved until the dispatch is confirmed. - **Multi-branch**: Each branch keeps its own stock, staff and takings. The group view reads across them without merging anything. ##### Watch the till do the work The two things worth seeing move rather than read about: a sale being rung up, and a phone standing in for a barcode scanner. ##### A till that speaks fluent repair shop Ring up repairs, accessories and second-hand devices, take split payments across card and cash, and print or text a receipt in seconds. ##### Turn any phone into a barcode scanner Show the QR on the till, scan it with a staff phone, and start scanning stock straight into the open sale. No scanner hardware, no app to install, and no login on the phone. ##### How to do it, on the real screens Short, numbered guides for the jobs a shop does every day. Each one is written against the app as it is, not as a promise of what it will do. ##### Book a repair in Create a repair ticket at the counter: customer, device, fault, price, an optional deposit and technician, then print the ticket for the customer. ##### Ring up a sale Put accessories, parts and a used device on one sale, take the money across more than one method, and print the receipt. ##### Add a device to stock Put a second-hand device on the shelf with its own IMEI or serial number, condition, cost and price, so it is priced as itself rather than as a model. #### A clear, uncluttered shop dashboard ##### Today at a glance Takings, open repairs and jobs due out: the moment you open up. ##### Numbers you can trust Every figure traces back to the record it came from: no second spreadsheet. ##### Jump to any screen ⌘K opens a finder for every page, tab and action: no hunting through a sidebar. ##### Ten one-click jobs A repair, a sale, a trade-in, a stocktake, and you only see the tiles your role can use. One device is one record. Quantity is counted from units, never typed. Second-hand VAT is computed on the margin and kept off the invoice. Each shop keeps its own stock and staff under shared ownership. ##### Look at the paperwork, not a quote Three things you can inspect. If the documents are right, the system underneath is right. ##### A sale settled two ways Two payment lines on one checkout, with the total due and the amount collected side by side. The screen says paid in full only when the two meet: the case where money usually goes missing. ##### A device unit's record One device as its own record: how many are on the shelf, its cost and sell price, the margin between them, and a movements tab for how it got there. Quantity is derived from units, never typed. ##### A report total, and its source Gross revenue, refunds, parts cost and gross profit on one screen, each line the one above it less the one between. The total is not a separate number; it is the same lines, added up in front of you. ##### What happens if something goes wrong Moving a shop onto new software is the real decision. These are the parts that make it reversible. - **Migration**: Bring parts, accessories and devices in from a spreadsheet, and preview exactly what the import will do before anything is written. - **Role permissions**: Staff see and change what their role allows: refunds, voids and price edits are gated. - **Audit trail**: Money and stock movements are recorded with who did what and when. - **Your country, your tax rules**: Pick your country and the currency follows. Tax is a rule you set (a rate, inclusive, exclusive or margin) scoped to devices, parts or accessories, and to new or used stock. - **Printing that matches**: Receipts, A4 invoices, tickets and shelf labels come off one template, so the PDF, the thermal roll and the printed page all say the same thing. - **A link the customer can check**: The QR on a ticket or invoice opens a status page for that job: no login, no account, and search engines are told not to index it. - **Support**: Email support on every plan, priority on Professional and above. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### Four plans, one feature set Flat monthly pricing, never per device and never per transaction. Every plan includes repair tickets, point of sale, invoicing, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, purchasing, staff rotas and reports. **Starter**: £39/month or £390/year, excluding VAT. One location, everything you need to open up and trade. - Every SlickCell feature included - 3 app-access users - 5 employee profiles - Single location - Hosted in London - Manual one-off discounts - Standard email support **Professional**: £59/month or £590/year, excluding VAT. Multiple locations, discount rules and priority processing. - Every SlickCell feature included - 10 app-access users per branch - 15 employee profiles per branch - Multiple locations - Discount rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns - Priority large-job processing - Custom domain - Priority email support - Additional branches £39.00/mo each **Supplier Pro**: £99/month or £990/year, excluding VAT. Adds Supplier Operations: sell to other shops from your own catalogue. - Every SlickCell feature included - 15 app-access users per branch - 25 employee profiles per branch - Multiple locations - Supplier Operations included - Discount rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns - Priority large-job processing - Custom domain - Priority support - Additional locations £39.00/mo each **Enterprise**: price on application. Tailored to your organisation. - Every SlickCell feature included - Unlimited app-access users - Unlimited employee profiles - Unlimited locations - Supplier Operations included - Discount rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns - Super-fast large-job processing - Custom domain - Separate dedicated database - Dedicated account manager - Priority or contractual support ##### Questions about SlickCell repair shop software The quick answers. Can't find yours? Talk to our team. **What is SlickCell?** SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: phones, tablets, laptops, games consoles and smartwatches. It runs repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins, supplier ordering, staff rotas and reports in one web app, hosted in London. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. ##### Writing for the repair trade Practical reads on running a tidier, more profitable repair shop. ##### VAT margin scheme for used devices: how it works ##### Why stock by IMEI or serial beats a quantity count ##### Purchase orders, receiving, and the gap in between --- ## All features Source: https://slickcell.com/features #### All-in-one repair shop software The modules connect: that's the point. SlickCell is all-in-one repair shop software and POS for electronics repair and retail shops: repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, suppliers, staff rotas and reports on one set of records. A part used in the workshop reduces the stock on the shelf, lands in cost of goods and shows up in the month's profit, without anyone retyping it. ##### One repair, followed all the way through The same job from the counter to the ledger. Each step writes to the next, so nothing has to be re-entered and nothing changes silently. - **Repair booked**: Device, fault and customer captured against a ticket. - **Deposit taken**: Payment recorded against the job, balance tracked. - **Part reserved**: Stock is committed to the ticket, not just noted. - **Technician assigned**: The job joins a queue with an owner and a due time. - **Extra work quoted**: Added cost is quoted on the ticket before it reaches the bill. - **Final payment**: Balance settles across card, cash or store credit. - **Device handed over**: Handover closes the ticket and the stock movement. - **Invoice & warranty issued**: The document, the VAT and the report agree. Because those steps are joined, a part used reduces stock, the stock movement lands in cost of goods, and cost of goods lands in the profit and loss, and none of it can be changed silently. #### Front of shop: repair tickets, POS and customers - **Repairs**: Repair detail spread across paper, WhatsApp and memory. - One ticket from intake through to handover - Parts committed to the job, not just noted - Status, technician and due time on every job - **POS & Sales**: A till that was never built for repairs or used devices. - Repairs, accessories and devices on one sale - Split payments across card and cash - Receipts printed or sent by email - **Invoicing & payments**: Part payments treated as paid, or absorbed as discount. - Real paid, due and change status on every invoice - Refunds and credit notes as controlled flows - A settled invoice cannot be altered silently - **Customers**: No history when a customer returns with the same device. - Every repair, sale and payment against the customer - Devices linked to the person who owns them - Contact detail kept with the job, not in a phone - **Customer updates**: Ringing round to say a repair is ready. - Email or text a customer from the job, on a template - A live tracking page from the QR on their receipt - Every message kept against the customer record - **Reviews**: No idea which jobs left the customer happy. - Customers rate the job from the link on their receipt - Ratings roll up to the technician who did the work - Attribution is fixed when the review lands, not later #### Stock: inventory by IMEI or serial number - **Inventory & device units**: Stock that does not match what is actually on the shelf. - Devices tracked one unit at a time, by IMEI or serial - Parts and accessories counted by quantity - Stock movements recorded with who did what, and when - **Used devices & margin tax**: Second-hand VAT worked out by hand, job by job. - Cost, margin and selling price held per unit - Margin-scheme tax computed on the margin - Margin tax reported separately from standard tax - **Trade-in & buyback**: Trade-ins settled off the books and never reconciled. - Inspect, price and approve a device taken in - Pay out or apply the value against a sale - The device enters stock as its own unit - **Mobile scanning**: A scanner for every till, or no scanner at all. - Pair a staff phone by scanning the QR on the till - Scan stock straight into the open sale - No app, no login, and it cannot change a price or take payment #### Suppliers: purchase orders and the supplier network - **Purchase orders & receiving**: Supplier orders living in messages and spreadsheets. - Raise a purchase order against a supplier - Receive stock against the order, in full or in part - Supplier bills and returns kept with the order - **Returns to supplier**: Faulty stock going back on the shelf because nowhere else holds it. - Nothing goes back on sale unless someone chooses it - Restock, send to the supplier, or hold it to inspect - Faulty items tracked until the supplier settles them - **Supplier network**: Re-keying the same order into a supplier's system by hand. - Find and connect to suppliers who use SlickCell - Order against a catalogue the supplier keeps current - Suppliers run their own orders, dispatch and discrepancies #### Back office: reports, staff and branches - **Reports & tax**: The invoice and the report showing different totals. - Revenue and profit read from the same ledger as the invoices - Standard and margin-scheme tax reported separately - Figures trace back to the records behind them - An AI summary of your reports in plain English - **Workforce**: Staff access too broad, and hours kept on a wall chart. - Role permissions on refunds, voids and price edits - Rota and attendance against employee profiles - Job assignment and technician workload - **Multi-branch**: Each branch keeping its own numbers, in its own way. - One login across every branch - Stock and staff kept per branch - Reporting per branch or across the group - **Cash drawer**: The drawer and the day's takings never quite agreeing. - Open on a float, close on a counted breakdown - Expected against actual, with the difference shown - Cash movements attach to the session automatically - **Stocktake**: A count that overwrites the system with whatever was typed. - Count against a snapshot, not against live stock - The variance is what posts, once approved - Nothing moves until a manager signs it off ##### Questions about all-in-one repair shop software **What is SlickCell?** SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: phones, tablets, laptops, games consoles and smartwatches. It runs repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins, supplier ordering, staff rotas and reports in one web app, hosted in London. **What hardware do I need?** A computer, tablet or phone with a modern browser. Receipts, A4 invoices, repair tickets and shelf labels print from one template on a thermal or A4 printer, any staff phone can scan barcodes into the sale, and card payments go through the card machine you already have. **Does SlickCell run on an iPad?** Yes. SlickCell is web-based and runs in any modern browser on a computer, tablet or phone, so there is nothing to install on the iPad. Sign in at the counter and the same shop, repair queue and till are there as on any other device. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. --- ## Repairs Source: https://slickcell.com/features/repairs #### Repair ticket software, from booked in to handed over Every repair, with the money still correct. A repair is an intake, a deposit, a part, an approval, a balance and a handover. SlickCell keeps all of them on one ticket, for every phone, tablet, laptop, games console or smartwatch you repair, identified by IMEI or serial number. ##### Where a repair and its money come apart None of these are unusual. They are just what happens when the job lives on a board and the money lives somewhere else. - A deposit is taken at the counter and noted on the ticket, but never against the bill. - Extra work is agreed verbally, done, and then argued about at collection. - A part is fitted from the drawer and the stock count is corrected next week, or never. - The device is handed over before the balance is settled, and nobody can say who allowed it. - Two faults on one device become two half-finished tickets. - A repair is edited after it was paid, and the day's takings stop matching the invoices. ##### Repair tracking software: intake to handover on one record Each step writes to the next, and the ticket's status shows where every job is: booked in, waiting for parts, outsourced, completed or handed over. - **Intake**: Device, fault and customer captured against a ticket. - **Deposit**: Payment recorded against the job; the balance updates. - **Parts**: Stock committed to this ticket, not just written down. - **Approval**: Extra work is quoted, and how the customer agreed can be recorded on the job. - **Payment**: The balance settles across card, cash or store credit. - **Handover**: Handover closes the ticket and the stock movement. - **Invoice**: The document and the ledger carry the same figures. The point is not that the steps exist. It is that a part used reduces stock, the stock movement lands in cost of goods, and cost of goods lands in the profit and loss: without anyone retyping a number. ##### One ticket, its whole timeline Not a summary screen. The record a shop actually works from. ##### Everything that happened to this device, in order The status flow, the technician who owns it, the parts committed to it and what the customer has been told, on one record, in the order it happened. When a customer asks why the bill changed, the answer is on the ticket rather than in someone's memory. ##### What you get back at the end of the month The operational gain is obvious. The financial one is the reason this matters. - **One version of the job**: No board, no notebook and no phone thread to reconcile against each other. - **Deposits that count**: Money taken at intake is money against the bill, not a note to remember. - **Parts that move stock**: Fitting a part reduces the shelf and lands in cost of goods automatically. - **Balances you can see**: What is paid and what is still due is a figure, not a conversation. - **A history that holds**: Financial changes leave a record, so last month still reads the same next month. ##### The awkward jobs, and what the system does about them Any system handles the simple repair. These are the ones that decide whether the numbers survive the month. - **Multiple issues on one device**: Several faults stay on one ticket for one device, each with its own work and cost, so the customer gets one bill and you keep one history. - **Estimate only, not yet approved**: An estimate is a priced intention, not a job. It does not commit stock or create a charge until it is approved. - **Deposit taken at intake**: The deposit is recorded against the job immediately and reduces the balance due. It is money received, not a note on the ticket. - **Only part of the work approved**: The customer can approve some lines and decline others. The declined work leaves the bill rather than lingering as an assumption. - **A part added after the quote**: Added cost is quoted on the ticket and the price change is stamped and audited. It never quietly appears on the final bill. - **Additional payment required**: When approved work raises the total, the extra shows as a balance due rather than being absorbed into the original figure. - **Waiting for parts**: The ticket carries a waiting state, so a job held up by a supplier is distinguishable from one nobody has started. - **Outsourced repair**: A device sent out for specialist work stays on its ticket while it is away, so it is never simply missing from the shop. - **Cancelled before stock was allocated**: Cancelling early closes the ticket without touching stock, because nothing was committed to it yet. - **Cancelled after stock was allocated**: Committed stock has to be dealt with deliberately, returned to the shelf or accounted for, rather than silently released. - **Warranty claim on an earlier repair**: A warranty job links back to the original repair, so the return is attached to the work that caused it instead of looking like a new sale. - **Handing over before the balance is paid**: An unpaid handover requires a controlled override with a reason, and it leaves an audit entry naming who allowed it. - **A manager reverses something**: A reversal is a recorded action with its own history. A paid part cannot be removed silently, and an invoice cannot be reduced silently after payment: any post-payment change creates an adjustment, refund, credit note or approved write-off. Every one of those leaves an audit history. That is the difference between a system that records what happened and one that records what someone last typed. ##### What a repair ticket carries ##### One ticket per job Device, fault, customer and history on a single record from intake to handover. ##### Owner and queue Every job has an assigned technician and a place in the queue, not just a status. ##### Extra work stays visible Added work is quoted on the ticket before it reaches the bill, and every change to the price is recorded. ##### States that mean something Waiting for parts, outsourced and completed are distinct: not one vague 'in progress'. ##### Invoice from the same record The document is generated from the job, so the bill and the ticket cannot disagree. ##### Audit history Financial and stock changes are recorded with who did what, and when. ##### Warranty starts at handover Not at booking. Change the length later and the expiry is recalculated from the same start date, so the printed note and the record agree. ##### Print what you need Ticket, label, receipt or A4 invoice from one template, so the PDF and the paper never disagree. ##### A link the customer can check The QR on the ticket opens a status page for that job. No login, no account, and search engines are told not to index it. ##### Questions about repair ticket software Including the one that starts “we already use a whiteboard”. **We already use a whiteboard and it works. Why change?** A whiteboard tracks the job but not the money. It cannot tell you that a deposit was taken, that a part was fitted from stock, or that a bill changed after payment. The board is fine until someone asks why the takings and the invoices disagree. **Does a ticket handle more than one fault on the same device?** Yes. Several faults live on one ticket for one device, each with its own work and cost. The customer gets one bill and you keep one history, rather than two half-finished tickets for the same device. **What happens when extra work is needed halfway through?** It is quoted on the ticket first, and you can record how the customer agreed. The added cost stays visible and the balance due updates, so the customer is never surprised at collection and the original figure is not quietly rewritten: every price change is stamped and audited. **Can a repair be edited after the customer has paid?** Not silently. Once a payment is recorded, a change must create a controlled adjustment, an additional invoice, a credit note, a refund or an approved write-off. The original payment history is preserved either way. **Can we hand a device over before it is paid for?** Yes, but it is a deliberate act. An unpaid handover requires a controlled override with a reason, and it leaves an audit entry naming who allowed it, so it stays a decision rather than a habit. **What if a job has to be cancelled?** It depends whether stock was committed. Cancelling before allocation closes the ticket cleanly. Cancelling after means the committed parts have to be dealt with deliberately, so the shelf and the system stay in agreement. **What is a repair ticket?** A repair ticket is the record of one job: the customer, the device with its IMEI or serial number, the fault, the quote, any deposit, the parts used, the technician and the status, through to handover. In SlickCell the invoice is produced from the same ticket, so the job and the bill agree. **How do customers get repair updates?** By text or email from the job, on templates each shop can edit. Every receipt and repair label also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. --- ## POS & sales Source: https://slickcell.com/features/pos #### POS system for repair shops A till that keeps the money straight, not just the sale. The SlickCell POS system for repair shops rings up repairs, accessories and devices by IMEI or serial on one sale, splits the payment across card, cash, bank transfer and store credit, and keeps part payments, change and credit as separate figures. ##### Where the money quietly changes shape Every one of these balances on the day and still leaves you short at the month. - A customer pays most of it, promises the rest, and the sale gets marked paid. - The shortfall is written off as a discount because that is the only field that fits. - Cash change handed back is counted as though it were takings. - Store credit from a return is given as a price reduction, so the liability disappears. - A device is sold from a shelf that the system still thinks holds four. - A refunded device goes straight back out for sale without anyone checking it. ##### From the exact unit to a settled balance The sequence matters because each step is where a specific mistake usually happens. - **Exact unit**: The specific item or device, not a generic line. - **Basket**: Priced and totalled: stock is not touched yet. - **Split tender**: Card, cash or store credit, in any combination. - **Balance state**: Received, due, overpayment and change kept apart. - **Confirm**: Only now does stock move against the sale. - **Receipt**: The document carries the same figures as the ledger. The order is deliberate: nothing leaves the shelf on the strength of someone starting a sale, and nothing is called paid until the arithmetic says it is. ##### One sale, settled two ways The screen where the distinction between received, due and change is either kept or lost. ##### Card and cash on the same sale, both classified The total due, the amount collected and what is left are three separate figures, not one field called paid. Each tender line carries its own method and reference, so the cash drawer and the card total can both be reconciled at close, and a shortfall stays visible as a balance instead of quietly becoming a discount. ##### What the counter stops costing you These are the five leaks that a till which only knows paid and unpaid cannot close. - **Shortfalls stay visible**: An underpayment is a balance you can chase, not a discount you absorbed. - **Change is not takings**: Cash handed back is never reported as revenue, so the day's figure is real. - **Credit stays a liability**: Store credit moves on a ledger instead of vanishing into a price reduction. - **Stock matches the shelf**: Nothing is deducted because a sale was started: only because one completed. - **Returns are decided**: Where returned stock goes is chosen, not assumed, and it is not resold unchecked. ##### The rules the till actually enforces Not settings you have to remember. This is how the sale behaves. - **The exact item is selected**: You sell the specific part, or the specific device by its IMEI, serial or shop reference: never a generic line that stands in for whichever one happens to be on the shelf. - **The basket does not touch stock**: Adding an item to a sale reserves nothing and deducts nothing. A half-started sale at a busy counter cannot make your stock figures wrong. - **Stock moves on confirmation**: The shelf changes only when the sale reaches its confirmed, approved state: one movement, at one moment, with a record attached. - **Five figures, kept apart**: Amount received, invoice total, amount due, overpayment and change are five separate numbers. Collapsing them into one is exactly how shortfalls disappear. - **Underpayment is never a discount**: Paying less than the total creates a visible balance against the sale. There is no path where a shortfall silently becomes a price reduction. - **Change is not revenue**: Cash given back is recorded as change, not as money taken, so the day's revenue figure is not inflated by the float moving in and out. - **Store credit is a ledger movement**: Credit issued and credit spent are entries on a ledger you can read back, a liability the shop owes, rather than a discount that leaves no trace. - **Returned stock has a destination**: On a refund you choose deliberately where the item goes. It does not default back onto the sales shelf because that was the easiest option. - **Refunded devices are not automatically resellable**: A returned device goes back on sale only if someone chooses that at the refund, as new or as used. Otherwise it waits in Faulty Items to be inspected, goes back to the supplier, or is scrapped or written off. ##### Point of sale for repair shops: what the till carries ##### Sell the exact unit Repairs, accessories and individual devices on the same sale, each identified. ##### Split tender Card, cash, bank transfer and store credit in any combination on one sale. ##### Balance arithmetic Received, total, due, overpayment and change tracked as separate figures. ##### Store credit ledger Credit issued and spent as recorded movements, not as invisible discounts. ##### Controlled returns Every refund says where the item goes: back as new or used, to Faulty Items, or to the supplier. ##### Receipt from the sale The document is produced from the sale record, so the two cannot disagree. ##### Scan, print, pay your way A barcode scanner or any staff phone scans into the sale, receipts print on the thermal roll or go by email, and card payments go through your own card machine. ##### Questions about a POS system for repair shops Starting with the one that matters most at a queue. **Our current till is faster. Won't this slow the counter down?** A sale is a few taps either way. The time a shop actually loses is at the month end, reconciling a till that recorded a part payment as paid and a shortfall as a discount. This is the same speed at the counter and considerably faster afterwards. **Does adding an item to the basket reduce my stock?** No. Stock changes only when the sale is confirmed. A basket that is abandoned, edited or left open at a busy counter has no effect on your stock figures at all. **What happens when a customer pays only part of the bill?** The difference stays as a visible balance against the sale. It is never converted into a discount, so you can see what is owed, chase it, and settle it later against the same record rather than a new one. **How is cash change handled?** Change is recorded as change and never counted as revenue. Amount received, invoice total, amount due, overpayment and change are five separate figures, so the day's takings reflect money kept rather than money handled. **What happens to store credit from a return?** It moves on a ledger. Credit issued is a liability the shop owes and credit spent is an entry against it, so you can read back what was given and what has been used, rather than a price reduction that leaves no trace. **Can a refunded device go straight back on sale?** Only if someone chooses it. At the refund you say where each returned device goes: back to stock as new or as used, to Faulty Items to be inspected first, back to the supplier, scrapped or written off. Nothing goes back in the window by default. **Does SlickCell run on an iPad?** Yes. SlickCell is web-based and runs in any modern browser on a computer, tablet or phone, so there is nothing to install on the iPad. Sign in at the counter and the same shop, repair queue and till are there as on any other device. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **What hardware do I need?** A computer, tablet or phone with a modern browser. Receipts, A4 invoices, repair tickets and shelf labels print from one template on a thermal or A4 printer, any staff phone can scan barcodes into the sale, and card payments go through the card machine you already have. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. --- ## Invoicing & payments Source: https://slickcell.com/features/invoicing #### Repair shop invoice software Invoices, payments and refunds in one financial history. SlickCell is repair shop invoice software that raises the invoice from the repair or the sale, records every part payment against it, and turns any later correction into an adjustment, credit note, refund or write-off instead of an edit. ##### Where settled money quietly changes Each of these is a reasonable thing to do at the counter. Together they are why the books stop agreeing with the till. - A paid invoice is edited to fix a line, and last week's takings change with it. - A goodwill reduction is applied by overwriting the total rather than recording it. - A part refund is handed back in cash and noted on a scrap of paper. - Two invoices exist for one job because it was easier than correcting the first. - The report and the invoice list disagree, and nobody can say which is right. - An amount is written off, and six weeks later nobody remembers who agreed it. ##### Invoice, part payment, adjustment, refund, credit note The sequence a real job actually takes, and the point at which the rules change. - **Invoice raised**: Generated from the job, carrying its lines and totals. - **Part payment**: Recorded against the invoice; the balance updates. - **Still open**: Draft and unpaid invoices update through the ticket workflow. - **Payment recorded**: From here, settled history can no longer be rewritten. - **Adjustment**: A later change becomes a recorded correction of its own. - **Credit or refund**: Money owed back is a credit note or a refund, not an edit. The line in the middle is the whole page. Before a payment, an invoice is a working document. After one, it is financial history, and history gets corrected by adding to it, never by overwriting it. ##### The document, and the report that reads from it Two artefacts in real markup. The figures in the second are the invoices in the first. ##### One invoice, every tender against it The subtotal, the tax, the total, what has been received, what change went back and what is still due: as separate figures on the document itself. A part payment leaves a visible balance rather than a rounded-down total, and each tender line keeps its own method and date. ##### Reports read from the same underlying records Reports read from the same underlying financial records as the invoices, with reconciliation checks and drill-downs, so a revenue figure opens onto the invoices that compose it, and the rows add up to the headline rather than approximating it. ##### What you can prove three months later Not that nothing ever goes wrong: that everything which did is still legible. - **Corrections are additive**: A change adds a record rather than replacing one, so the original stays readable. - **Payments survive edits**: The payment history is preserved whatever happens to the invoice afterwards. - **Reasons travel with money**: A credit, a refund or a write-off carries why it happened, not just how much. - **One job, one thread**: Related documents stay linked instead of becoming two unrelated invoices. - **Figures you can open**: A total drills down to the records that produced it when someone asks. ##### What happens when something has to change Every one of these is a real thing that happens after money has moved. None of them overwrites what was there. - **The invoice is still draft or unpaid**: It can be updated through the approved ticket workflow, because nothing has been settled yet. This is the only window in which the document itself changes. - **A payment has been recorded**: From that point, financial changes cannot silently rewrite settled history. Every correction below adds a record instead of editing the original. - **Work was added after the bill was paid**: The extra becomes a controlled adjustment or an additional invoice. The first invoice keeps the figures it was paid against. - **A line has to come off**: Removing a charge after payment creates a recorded correction, not a deletion. A paid part cannot simply disappear from the job. - **A discount is agreed afterwards**: It is recorded as a correction with its own entry, rather than the total being quietly reduced to match what the customer actually handed over. - **The customer was overcharged**: A credit note records what is owed back, linked to the invoice that caused it, so the correction and the original are readable together. - **Money goes back to the customer**: A refund is recorded as its own movement against the invoice. It reduces what has been settled without pretending the original payment never happened. - **A small balance will never be paid**: It is closed with an approved write-off carrying a reason, rather than being absorbed into a discount that leaves no trace of the decision. - **Somebody asks why the total moved**: The invoice carries its adjustments, credits and refunds as history, so the answer is on the record rather than in whoever happened to be on the counter that day. Added charges, removals, discounts and corrections must create a controlled adjustment, an additional invoice, a credit note, a refund or an approved write-off, and the original payment history is preserved. ##### Repair shop billing software: what an invoice carries ##### Invoice from the job Generated from the record it belongs to, so the bill and the work cannot disagree. ##### Part payments Received, due and change tracked separately, with a visible balance rather than a rounded total. ##### Adjustments Post-payment changes recorded as corrections that sit alongside the original. ##### Credit notes What is owed back, linked to the invoice that caused it and readable together. ##### Payment history Every tender, correction and refund against the invoice, in the order it happened. ##### No silent rewrites Once a payment exists, settled history is added to rather than overwritten. ##### A4 or thermal, from one template The invoice prints on A4 or the receipt roll from the same template as its PDF, and its QR opens the invoice for the customer later. ##### Questions about repair shop invoice software Including the one that comes up on every call. **My accountant already handles this. Why does it matter?** Your accountant works from what you give them. If a paid invoice was edited in March, they are reconciling a figure that no longer matches the payment it received. This does not replace an accountant. It means the records handed over are the records that actually happened. **Can I edit an invoice after the customer has paid?** Not directly. Draft and unpaid invoices update through the approved ticket workflow. Once a payment is recorded, added charges, removals, discounts and corrections must create a controlled adjustment, an additional invoice, a credit note, a refund or an approved write-off, and the original payment history is preserved. **What if a customer pays only part of the bill?** The balance stays visible against the invoice. Received, due and change are separate figures, so a shortfall remains something you can chase and settle later rather than being absorbed into the total as though it were a discount. **How do refunds and credit notes differ?** A credit note records that money is owed back and links to the invoice that caused it. A refund records money actually going back to the customer. Both sit alongside the original rather than modifying it, so the sequence stays readable afterwards. **Can a bad debt be written off?** Yes, as an approved write-off carrying a reason. The balance is closed deliberately and the decision is recorded, rather than the amount quietly becoming a discount that nobody can account for at the year end. **Will my reports match my invoices?** Reports read from the same underlying financial records as the invoices, with reconciliation checks and drill-downs. A revenue figure opens onto the invoices behind it, so where a difference exists you can see which records produced it rather than guessing. **Can the customer see the invoice again later?** Yes. The receipt and the invoice carry a QR code that opens that invoice on a page of its own, with no login and no account, and search engines are told not to index it. A lost receipt is not a phone call to the shop. **How do I get my figures to my accountant?** Export them. Profit and loss, VAT including the margin scheme, payments, the account ledger, stock and payroll export to CSV from the report you are reading. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. --- ## Inventory & device units Source: https://slickcell.com/features/inventory #### Serial number tracking software for phones, laptops and consoles Parts by quantity. Devices one unit at a time. SlickCell is serial number tracking software for shops that repair and sell electronics: a phone by its IMEI, a laptop, tablet, games console or smartwatch by its serial number, each with its own cost, condition and history from the day it arrives to the day it sells or comes back. ##### Where the count goes wrong Not carelessness. Just what happens when four different devices share one line called “iPhone 13”. - Four of the same model on the shelf, bought at four different prices, counted as one line. - Three of the same laptop model, bought at three different prices, counted as one line. - The right device is sold, but nobody can say which one left or what it cost you. - A part is used on a repair and the count is corrected at the weekend, if anyone remembers. - A trade-in goes on the shelf without a cost, so the margin on it is a guess. - The system says three, the drawer says one, and neither has a history to check. - A device comes back from a refund and rejoins stock without anyone recording why. ##### How serial number tracking works in SlickCell One model is a group. Each physical device inside it is its own record, with its own IMEI or serial number. The quantity is what falls out of that, not something anyone types. - **Product group**: The model, iPhone 13 128GB, as a heading, not a count. - **Units**: One record per device, with its own IMEI or serial number. - **Own specs**: Storage, colour, condition and battery per unit. - **Own money**: Cost and selling price held on the unit itself. - **Movements**: Received, reserved, sold or returned: each recorded. - **Derived quantity**: Available stock is counted from the units. Because quantity is derived rather than typed, there is no way for the number to drift away from the things it is supposed to be counting. ##### One model, and the devices inside it Real markup, not a screenshot: the figures below are checkable against each other. ##### Three devices, three costs, one model Each unit carries its own identifier, condition, battery health, cost and selling price, and the sold one carries the invoice it left on. The available stock value underneath is the sum of the units still on the shelf, so you can check the total against the rows that produced it. ##### Serialised inventory for repair and retail shops The same device record follows the unit through everything the shop does with it. - **Scanned at the till**: Scan or type an IMEI or serial number at the till and that exact unit goes on the sale, at its own price, and leaves stock against the invoice. - **Searched in stock**: The inventory search box finds one device by its IMEI or serial number, with its cost, condition and every movement since it arrived. - **Bought in as a trade-in**: A device taken in from a customer enters stock as its own unit, with the price you actually paid as its cost. - **Sold second-hand**: Used and refurbished devices keep their own purchase cost, so the margin on each one is known when it sells. - **Returned**: A device that comes back gets the outcome someone chooses at the refund: back to stock as new or used, or held in Faulty Items to be inspected. The return is on its history. ##### Traceable from purchase to sale to return Each unit's history answers the three questions that matter: which one, what it cost, and where it went. The operational win is knowing what is there; the financial win is knowing what it cost. - **Real cost per device**: Margin is calculated against what that unit actually cost, not an average. - **The right one sold**: You know which physical device left the shop, and against which sale. - **Counts that hold**: Quantity is derived from units, so it cannot drift from what is on the shelf. - **A movement history**: Every arrival, reservation, sale and return is recorded with who and when. - **Defensible valuation**: Stock value is the sum of real unit costs you can open up and check. ##### Move your serial numbers in from a spreadsheet These are the rules the import actually follows. Nothing here is aspirational. - **Three separate imports**: Parts, accessories and devices come in as three separate imports, because they are three different kinds of thing with three different shapes. - **Quantity for parts, references for devices**: Parts and accessories are imported with a quantity. Device quantity is derived from the unit references you supply, not entered as a number. - **One unit per reference**: Each device unit corresponds to one IMEI, serial number or shop reference. Two units cannot share one reference. - **The reference can be partial**: A full IMEI, a serial number, the last four or five digits, or an internal shop reference are all accepted, stored as free text, with no format or checksum rule to fight. - **Prices in pounds**: Costs and selling prices are entered in pounds, the way they appear on your supplier's invoice. - **Suppliers by ID**: A supplier is selected by its supplier ID, so the same name spelled three ways does not become three suppliers. - **Preview before commit**: You see what the import will do before anything is written. Nothing lands in your stock on the strength of a file you have not looked at. - **Warnings and errors are separate**: Rows that cannot be imported and rows that merely look odd are shown apart, so a genuine problem is not buried among things that are simply unusual. - **Update mode is explicit**: Whether the import updates existing stock is a choice you make deliberately, not a default that quietly overwrites what is already there. - **No barcode required**: The approved import format does not require a barcode, so a spreadsheet from an older system is enough to get started. ##### What the stock module carries ##### Unit-level devices Each device is its own record with an IMEI, serial or shop reference as free text. ##### Quantity for consumables Parts and accessories counted the sensible way, by quantity on the shelf. ##### Specs per unit Storage, colour, condition and battery health held on the individual device. ##### Cost and price per unit What that device cost you and what it sells for, not a blended average. ##### Movement history Arrivals, reservations, sales and returns recorded with who did what, and when. ##### Import with a preview Bring stock in from a spreadsheet and see exactly what it will do first. ##### Serial number tracking: questions shops ask Starting with the one everyone asks about unit tracking. **Unit tracking sounds like extra work. Is it?** It is one extra field when a device arrives, and it removes the work of reconciling a count that drifted. You are already tracking these devices: on a whiteboard, in a notebook, or in your head. This just puts them where the money is. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **How do I keep track of serial numbers?** Give each device its own record when it arrives, with its serial or IMEI, cost and condition, and let the system count the units. In SlickCell the number is free text, so a full serial, the last digits or your own sticker reference are all accepted, and duplicates are flagged for someone to resolve. **Do I have to track parts one at a time as well?** No, and you should not. Parts and accessories are counted by quantity, which is the right shape for a box of screen protectors. Only devices are tracked as individual units, because only devices have their own cost, condition and history. **How does the quantity stay right?** It is derived rather than typed. Available stock is counted from the unit records themselves, so there is no separate number to fall out of step with the shelf and no way to correct one without the other. **Can I bring my existing stock in from a spreadsheet?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import separately, prices are entered in pounds and suppliers are selected by supplier ID. You preview what the import will do before anything is written, with warnings and errors shown separately. **What happens when a device comes back from a refund?** It does not rejoin sellable stock on its own. At the refund someone chooses where it goes: back to stock as new or as used, to Faulty Items to be inspected first, or back to the supplier. --- ## Used devices & the margin scheme Source: https://slickcell.com/features/used-devices #### Refurbished electronics inventory software, costed device by device Two identical devices are not the same stock. SlickCell is refurbished electronics inventory software for shops that buy, refurbish and sell used phones, tablets, laptops, games consoles and smartwatches: every device is its own record, by IMEI or serial, with its own cost, condition and price, and taxed under the UK VAT margin scheme where it applies. ##### Where second-hand stock stops adding up Quantity-based stock control was designed for parts. Devices break it. - Four of the same model in stock, bought for four different prices, showing as one line. - A device sells and nobody can say which one went, or what it cost. - Which units came in on a tax invoice and which did not is in somebody's memory. - Battery health and condition were noted on the box, and the box is gone. - A device is sold at the shelf price when that particular unit cost far more. - A returned device goes straight back on the shelf without anyone checking it. - Three of the same laptop, each with a different battery and a different cost. ##### One used device, one record, from purchase to sale A device unit is created when the device arrives and is closed when it leaves. Everything about it hangs off that one row. - **Intake**: The device gets its own record and its own reference. - **Specs**: Storage, colour, condition, battery health and network, per unit. - **Cost**: What this device cost you, not what the model usually costs. - **Price**: A selling price on the unit itself, not on the model. - **Sale**: That specific unit leaves stock, at its own price. - **Tax**: If it sells on the margin, the tax follows the margin. - **After**: A return goes back on the shelf only when someone chooses it; otherwise it waits to be inspected. Because quantity is derived from the units rather than typed, the count and the shelf cannot drift apart. There is no number for anyone to correct. ##### Refurbished stock with its own cost and condition Not a stock line. A device. ##### Where this device came from and what it did Its reference, its specs, what it cost, what it sold for and every movement in between, for that unit, not for the model. When a customer comes back three months later, the answer is on the record. ##### The unit's price wins, every time A device that cost more sells for more, even if the model's default price says otherwise. The price is taken from the unit when the invoice is raised, so a busy counter cannot accidentally sell a premium unit at the shelf figure. ##### The VAT margin scheme on one used device, worked through The same figures as our free calculator and the VAT margin scheme guide. - **Bought from a member of the public: £180.00**: No VAT was charged, so there is none to reclaim. The £180.00 is held on that unit as its cost. - **Sold for £240.00**: The price comes from the unit when the sale is written. - **Margin: £240.00 − £180.00 = £60.00**: VAT is due on the margin, not on the £240.00. - **VAT: £60.00 ÷ 6 = £10.00**: One sixth, because the margin already includes the VAT (20/120). Charging the standard rate on it would be £12.00. - **Kept after VAT: £50.00**: Without the scheme, VAT on the full £240.00 would have been £40.00. - **A £40.00 part fitted before sale: the VAT is still £10.00**: Repairs and parts cannot go into the margin. Where you were charged VAT on the part, you reclaim it on your VAT return in the normal way. What you keep is £50.00 minus £40.00: £10.00. General information, not tax advice. Check HMRC's guidance or speak to your accountant about your circumstances. ##### Used and refurbished stock you can price and tax - **Real margin per device**: Profit is this unit's price minus this unit's cost: not an average across a model that flatters the good buys and hides the bad ones. - **Tax that follows the unit**: Margin-taxed stock is treated on its margin and reported separately from standard-rated sales. - **A history you can answer from**: Every unit carries where it came from, what was done to it and where it went. - **Returns that get a decision**: A refunded device comes back as a unit someone decides about, not as a number added to a count. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### The ones that catch out quantity-based systems - **You only know the last four digits**: The reference is free text on purpose. Shops key shorthand, and a system that refuses it just gets a fake number typed into it instead. - **Two units end up with the same reference**: It is flagged as a conflict to resolve rather than blocked outright, so the unit still gets recorded, and the clash surfaces where someone can fix it. - **One model, six different costs**: Each unit holds its own. There is no average cost standing in for six different purchases. - **Some units came in on a tax invoice, some did not**: That is a property of the unit, which is what decides how its sale is taxed. - **A sold device comes back**: It returns to a state that means 'returned', not 'available'. Putting it back on the shelf is a decision someone makes, not a side effect. - **A unit is being held for a customer**: Reserved is its own state, so it is not sold twice while the customer thinks about it. - **The device is locked and the customer left the code**: PIN, password or a drawn pattern can be held against the device, behind a role check, and every look at it is recorded. None of these need a workaround. They are states a unit already carries. ##### What unit tracking carries ##### One unit, one record Every physical device is its own row, from intake to sale. ##### Free-text references IMEI or serial as you actually write it, with clashes flagged rather than blocked. ##### Specs per device Storage, colour, condition, battery health, network and region on the unit. ##### Cost and price per device What this one cost and what this one sells for: the unit's price is the one that applies. ##### Margin tax where it applies Used stock can be taxed on the margin and reported apart from standard sales. ##### Movement history Every state change on the unit, with who did it and when. ##### Refurbished and used stock: what shops ask **Is there VAT on a used device I sell?** If you are VAT registered, yes, but under the margin scheme only on your margin. Buy a used phone for £180.00, sell it for £240.00, and the VAT is one sixth of the £60.00 difference: £10.00. If the scheme's conditions are not met, VAT is due on the full selling price. **Do I have to type a full IMEI or serial number for every device?** No. The reference is free text, so last-four or last-five shorthand is fine. That is how shops actually work. There is no format or checksum validation, deliberately: a system that rejects real-world shorthand only teaches people to type a fake number that passes. **What if two units end up with the same reference?** The clash is detected and flagged for someone to resolve, rather than the unit being refused at the point of entry. The record still exists, and the conflict surfaces where it can be dealt with. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **Does a returned device go back into stock automatically?** Not unless someone chooses it. At the refund you say where the device goes: back to stock as new or as used, to Faulty Items to be inspected first, or back to the supplier. By default it waits in Faulty Items. **We sell parts and accessories too. Does everything become unit-tracked?** No. Parts and accessories stay quantity-based, which is the right model for them. Unit tracking is for the stock where each item genuinely differs. --- ## Trade-in & buyback Source: https://slickcell.com/features/buyback #### Buyback software for phone, laptop and console trade-ins Buying a device is a purchase, not a note in the drawer. Money leaves the till and a device arrives with no paperwork behind it. SlickCell is buyback software that makes both one record: inspected, approved, paid and on the shelf, whether it is a phone, tablet, laptop, games console or smartwatch. ##### Where a trade-in disappears Buying stock from the public is the one flow most shop systems simply do not have. - Cash goes out of the drawer and the day's takings never explain it. - A device is bought at the counter and priced by whoever happened to be on. - The device sits in a drawer for a week before anyone lists it. - Store credit is promised verbally and honoured from memory. - Nobody can say what the shop paid for a device it is about to sell. - The seller's details were written on a pad that is now full. ##### How a trade-in moves through buyback software Each step is a state the record actually holds, so at any moment you can see exactly how far a buy has got. - **Take it in**: The device, its IMEI or serial, and the seller's detail are captured. - **Inspect**: Condition, lock status and blacklist-check result recorded before any money is agreed. - **Approve**: A manager signs off the price the shop is paying. - **Purchase**: The buy is committed at the approved figure. - **Pay the seller**: Cash, bank transfer, store credit or against a sale. - **Add to inventory**: The device becomes a unit in stock with its own cost and specs. Because paying the seller is a real money movement, it reaches the cash drawer and the account ledger the same way every other payment does, rather than being an unexplained gap in the day. ##### One buy, start to finish The record, and the money it moved. ##### Inspected first, priced second, paid third A buy waits for inspection and then for a manager's approval before any money is committed. The person on the counter can start the record without being the person who decides what the shop pays for it. ##### Credit you can account for Settle a trade-in as store credit and it becomes a ledger entry, not a promise. It is applied against a sale as a real payment, so the customer's balance and the shop's books agree about what is owed. ##### Money out of the drawer is money you can explain - **The payout is accounted for**: Paying a seller is a recorded money movement that reaches the drawer, the account ledger and the reports. - **Pricing is a decision, not a habit**: Inspection and approval sit between the device arriving and the shop paying for it. - **The device enters stock properly**: It becomes a unit in stock with the cost you actually paid, so its margin is real when it sells. - **Seller detail is held, and restricted**: The record keeps who you bought from, and that detail is visible only to the roles that should see it. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### The awkward ones, handled - **The device fails inspection**: The buy is rejected as a recorded outcome. It does not vanish. You can see what was turned away and why. - **The seller changes their mind**: Cancelled is its own state, distinct from rejected. What happened is still on the record. - **They want credit instead of cash**: Store credit is one of the settlement methods, and becomes a ledger entry applied against a future sale. - **They are trading in against something they are buying now**: The trade-in value settles against the sale rather than money going out and coming straight back in. - **The shop paid too much**: The cost stays on the unit, so the thin margin is visible when it sells instead of being averaged away. - **A staff member should not see seller details**: Sensitive seller information is restricted by role, so the counter can take a device in without the whole shop seeing the person's details. - **The device is locked**: PIN, password or a drawn pattern can be recorded against the device, behind a role check and with every reveal audited. - **It is a console or a laptop, not a phone**: Pick the device type and enter its serial. The same intake, inspection, approval and payout apply, and it enters stock as a unit tracked by serial. What you are required to record when buying from the public differs by country, the system holds the detail, but check what applies where you trade. ##### What the trade-in module carries ##### Inspection before price Condition, lock status and the blacklist-check result recorded before the shop commits to a figure. ##### Manager approval The payout figure is signed off by someone with the authority to sign it off. ##### Four ways to settle Cash, bank transfer, store credit, or against something they are buying. ##### Store credit ledger Credit is a balance that gets applied as a real payment, not a promise. ##### Straight into unit stock The device becomes a unit in stock carrying the cost you actually paid. ##### Restricted seller detail Who you bought from is held on the record and visible only to the right roles. ##### Trade-in and buyback: what shops ask **What is trade-in software for a shop?** It turns buying a used device from the public into a tracked purchase. In SlickCell the record holds the seller, the device and its IMEI or serial, the inspection, a manager's approval of the price and the payout, and the device then enters stock at the cost you paid, so its margin is real when it sells. **Can I take in laptops and consoles, not only phones?** Yes. Choose the device type when you start the trade-in and record its serial number instead of an IMEI. Inspection, approval, payment and stock work the same way for a laptop, tablet, games console or smartwatch as for a phone. **We only take a few trade-ins a week. Is this worth it?** The volume is not the problem: the untracked cash is. A handful of unexplained payouts a week is exactly the kind of thing that makes a month's cash refuse to reconcile, and it is far harder to unpick later than to record at the counter. **Can the person on the counter take a device in without deciding the price?** Yes, and that is the intended shape. They create the record and inspect; approval of what the shop pays is a separate state that a manager moves it through. **How does store credit actually work?** It is its own ledger. Settling a buy as store credit creates a balance for that customer, and when they spend it, it is applied against the sale as a real payment, so both sides of it appear in the books. **What do we have to record when buying from the public?** The record holds the seller's details, the device and its IMEI or serial, the inspection, the price and the date against every buy, and only the owner and manager roles can see the seller's details. Check with your own adviser which of these the rules where you trade require you to keep. **Does the trade-in show up in reports?** Yes. Buyback has its own report, the payout appears in the money account as cash going out, and the device's cost follows it into stock so its margin is right when it sells. --- ## Customers Source: https://slickcell.com/features/customers #### Repair shop CRM for customers and their devices The same person, the same device, the third time they come in. SlickCell keeps every repair, sale, payment and device against the customer who owns it, so the original job, the part that went in and whether it is still under warranty are on the record. ##### Where customer history goes Almost every shop has this problem, and almost none of them call it a CRM problem. - A customer returns with the same fault and nobody can find the original job. - Their number is in one person's phone, under a nickname. - Two records for the same person, spelled differently. - Nobody can say whether the repair they are complaining about is still in warranty. - The device passcode was written on a sticky note that came off. - A refund was given months ago and there is no trace of why. ##### One person, everything attached The customer record is not a contact card. It is the thing every job, sale and payment hangs off. Repair history, devices, quotes and invoices, messages and reviews hang off one customer. - **The person**: Name and contact detail, captured once at the counter. - **Their devices**: Devices linked to the person who actually owns them. - **Their jobs**: Every repair against the customer and the device it was on. - **Their money**: Sales, payments, refunds and credit notes as one history. - **Their messages**: What they were told about the job, and when. - **Their view**: What they said about the work, from the link on the receipt. Because the invoice freezes who the customer was when it was issued, correcting a name today does not quietly rewrite a document that was already given to someone. ##### The record the counter actually needs Answering the question a returning customer just asked. ##### Which device, which job, and is it still covered Devices belong to the person who owns them, and every repair sits against both. When someone comes back with the same fault, the original job, the part that went in and whether it is still in warranty are on the record, not reconstructed from a date and a guess. ##### The passcode, held properly A PIN, a password or a pattern drawn on a 3x3 grid: the three ways phones and tablets lock. It is stored behind a restricted call rather than sitting on the device record, ordinary screens never return it, and every time someone reveals it that is checked against their role and written to the audit log. ##### Repeat customers stop starting from scratch - **Warranty questions have an answer**: The original job, the part and the cover are on the record, so the counter is not negotiating from memory. - **Devices belong to people**: Devices are linked to owners, and a change of owner is a recorded action. - **One financial history**: Sales, payments, refunds and credit notes read as one story rather than four lists. - **Codes are held safely**: Unlock codes are restricted and every look at one is audited. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### The awkward ones, handled - **The same person entered twice**: Matching helps catch it at the counter, where it is cheap to fix, rather than at year end when it is not. - **They sold the device to someone else**: Ownership transfer is a recorded action, so the device moves to the new owner and the history of the move survives. - **Their name was spelled wrong on an invoice they already have**: Correct the customer, and the issued invoice keeps the identity it was issued with. A document someone is holding does not change under them. - **A credit note from a refund months ago**: It is refund history: a record of what was returned and why. It is not a spendable balance, and the page never pretends otherwise. - **They want to know how the repair is going**: The QR on their ticket opens a status page for that job, with no login and no account. - **You need to tell fifty customers something**: Messages can go to a group of customers on a template, and each one is kept against the customer it went to. - **The customer left a bad review**: It arrives against the job and the technician who did it, with the attribution fixed at the moment it landed. Store credit from a trade-in is a different thing to a credit note: that lives with buyback. ##### Repair shop CRM software: what the customer record carries ##### The person Contact detail captured once, with duplicates caught at the counter. ##### Devices they own Devices linked to their owner, with transfers recorded. ##### Every job and sale Repairs, purchases and warranty state against the person and the device. ##### One financial history Payments, refunds and credit notes as a single story you can follow. ##### What they were told Messages sent from the job, on a template, kept against the customer. ##### What they thought Ratings from the link on their receipt, attributed to the job that earned them. ##### Questions about a repair shop CRM **Is this a CRM? We do not want to run marketing campaigns.** Yes: a repair shop CRM, meaning the operational record a counter needs. Who owns which device, what you did to it and what they paid, ready the moment someone walks back in. Bulk messages go only to customers who have opted in to marketing, and only when you choose to send them. **How do customers get repair updates?** By text or email from the job, on templates each shop can edit. Every receipt and repair label also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. **How are device passcodes stored?** Behind a restricted call, not on the device record. Ordinary screens never return the code, revealing it is checked against your role, and every reveal is written to the audit log. Patterns are supported as a drawn 3x3 sequence, because that is how a lot of phones and tablets lock. **Can a customer spend a credit note?** No. Credit notes here are refund history: the record of what was returned and why. Spendable balances come from trade-ins, which are a separate ledger. We keep those two apart deliberately, because conflating them is how shops end up honouring the same money twice. **If I correct a customer's name, does it change old invoices?** No. An invoice freezes the customer identity it was issued with. Correcting the record going forward does not rewrite a document somebody is already holding. **Can customers leave a review?** Yes. The link on their receipt lets the customer rate the job, and the rating lands against that job and the technician who did it, with the attribution fixed at the moment it arrives. Staff can read reviews but cannot edit them. --- ## Customer tracking & reviews Source: https://slickcell.com/features/customer-tracking #### Repair status tracking for your customers “Is it ready yet?” Answered without the phone call. The QR on the ticket you already hand over opens a page showing where that repair has got to in SlickCell. No app, no account, no password, and nothing on it that you would not say at the counter. ##### The call every shop takes ten times a day Each one is thirty seconds. Thirty seconds, ten times, on a Saturday, is the whole problem. - Someone rings to ask whether it is ready, and it is still on the bench. - The person who answers has to find the ticket before they can say anything. - A customer turns up to collect a device that is still waiting for a part. - The same customer rings three times because nothing told them anything changed. - A repair took longer than quoted and the first they hear of it is at the counter. - You ask for a review a week later, by which point the job is a blur to them. ##### From the counter to a repair status page Nothing here is a separate thing to set up. It is on the paperwork you already print. - **Book it in**: The ticket gets a link of its own, and a QR that encodes it. - **Print**: The QR is on the ticket, the label and the receipt as they come off the printer. - **They scan**: The phone camera opens the page. No account, no download, no login. - **They see progress**: The status, what it is, who has it, and when it is due back. - **Ready**: The page shows completed, so the trip to the shop is a trip worth making. - **Review**: Once the job is finished they can rate it, from the same link. The customer never creates anything. The link is the ticket, and the ticket already existed. ##### The QR is already on the paperwork Printed from the same template as everything else, so the link and the document cannot disagree. ##### Ticket, label, receipt or A4: one template The QR is generated as the document is drawn, so whichever format you print, it carries the link for that job. Change the paper size and it is the same document, not a different one. ##### What you get back - **Fewer interruptions**: The commonest question a repair shop is asked has an answer that does not need a person. - **Collections that are not wasted trips**: Someone who can see “not ready yet” does not come in to be told it. - **Nothing to sign up for**: No customer account, no portal password to reset, no app to persuade anyone to install. - **Reviews while it is fresh**: Asked at the moment the job finishes, from the link they already have open. - **Credit where it is due**: A review attaches to the technician who did the work, not to the shop in general. ##### What the repair status page shows A link anyone can open is a decision about disclosure, so this is the part worth reading. - **The repair page shows progress, not money**: Status, the stage it has reached, the device, who is working on it and when it is due. No prices, no line items, and the customer's first name only. - **The invoice page shows the bill**: A separate link, rendered from the same template as the printed receipt: the lines, the total, what has been paid and what is still due, with a PDF to download. - **Search engines are told to stay away**: Both pages carry noindex, nofollow and noarchive, and the site's robots file disallows them. They are unlisted pages, not published ones. - **Following one link does not unlock the other**: The repair page links to its invoice and the invoice links back, but each is checked on its own. - **A review waits for the job to finish**: The option appears once the repair is completed or handed over, whichever link the customer arrived through, and only once per repair. - **Reviews are yours, not ours**: They are visible inside your shop and nowhere else. Nothing publishes them to this site, to a directory, or to any public profile. ##### Repair status updates: what customer tracking carries ##### A QR on the paperwork On the ticket, the label and the receipt, generated as the document is drawn. ##### A status page with no login Stage, device, technician and due date, in the order things happened. ##### The invoice, and a PDF Lines, total, paid and balance due: the same document you would hand over. ##### Linked both ways The repair page opens its invoice, and the invoice opens the repair: each checked separately. ##### Unlisted and kept out of search Noindexed and disallowed in robots, so a repair page is reached only by the link on the customer's own receipt or label. ##### A rating out of five Offered once the job is finished, with an optional comment and name. ##### Attributed to the technician Each review is tied to whoever the job was assigned to, and shows on their record. ##### Whatever printer you have A4, 80mm, 58mm or a label: the QR is on all of them because they are one template. ##### Questions about repair status tracking **How do customers get repair updates?** By text or email from the job, on templates each shop can edit. Every receipt and repair label also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. **Our customers won't use it.** Some will not, and the calls from those people carry on exactly as now. The ones who do use it are the ones who would otherwise have rung twice, and scanning a code on a receipt with a phone camera is roughly as much effort as reading the receipt. **Can anyone with the link see it?** Yes, and that is why the page is built the way it is. The repair page carries no prices, no line items and only a first name. The links are unlisted, not published: search engines are told not to index them. **Does the customer need an account?** No. There is nothing to sign up for, no password and no app. The link is the whole thing. **How does the customer get the link?** It is printed as a QR code on their receipt and repair label, so they scan it once and keep checking. You can also paste the link into any message you send from the job. **When can a customer leave a review?** Once the repair is completed or handed over, and once per repair. Before that the option is not shown, so nobody is invited to rate a job that has not been done. **Do reviews appear anywhere public?** No. They are visible to your shop, summarised on the customer record and on the technician who did the work. Nothing publishes them anywhere else. --- ## Phone as a barcode scanner Source: https://slickcell.com/features/mobile-scanning #### Your staff already carry a barcode scanner Show a code on the SlickCell till, scan it with any phone in the shop, and that phone starts scanning stock into the open sale. Nothing to install, nothing to log in to, and nothing to buy. ##### Why the scanner never gets bought It is never urgent enough to buy and never cheap enough to buy four of. - One scanner, two tills, and it lives at whichever one used it last. - The second counter types SKUs by hand because the hardware never got ordered. - A Saturday assistant is handed the till and cannot be handed the cost prices with it. - Stock arrives in a box on the floor, nowhere near the desk the scanner is cabled to. - The wireless one is flat, and the charger is in the back. - Someone mistypes a SKU and the sale goes through against the wrong item. ##### Paired in about ten seconds The whole setup is a code on one screen and a camera on another. - **Open the sale**: Start a sale at the till as you normally would. - **Show the code**: The till displays a pairing QR, good for ten minutes. - **Scan it**: Any phone camera. The page opens; no app store, no sign-in. - **Confirm**: The phone asks whether to connect to that till, and names it. - **Scan stock**: Each barcode goes to the till, which resolves it and adds the line. - **Take payment**: Payment happens at the till. The phone cannot take money. - **Done**: Completing the sale ends the session, and the code is spent. The phone submits what it read. Everything else (resolving the code, the cart, the arithmetic) stays on the till. ##### The till keeps the cart The phone is an input device with a screen, not a second till. ##### Scanned lines land in the sale on the counter A scan is submitted as the raw code and resolved on the till, so the line that appears is the one the till's own catalogue matched: not something the phone decided. Quantities and removals work from the phone too; price changes and payment do not. ##### What you stop needing - **Hardware you did not buy**: Every counter can scan, including the one you set up for the Christmas rush. - **Nothing to install**: No app, no store, no device management, and no phone that needs enrolling. - **A phone you can hand to anyone**: It carries prices, because a till does. It does not carry cost, margin, customer details or full IMEI or serial numbers, and it cannot change a price or take a payment. - **Scanning where the stock is**: The box on the floor, the shelf at the back: not wherever the cable reaches. - **Fewer typed SKUs**: The commonest way a sale goes against the wrong item is somebody typing it. ##### What the phone can and cannot do Handing a member of staff a phone that is connected to the till is a permission decision, so here is exactly what it grants. - **It can scan, adjust quantity and remove a line**: The three things a second pair of hands actually needs while a sale is being built. - **It cannot change a price or take a payment**: Discounting, overriding a price and tendering all stay at the till, under whatever role the person on the till has. - **It sees prices, not cost**: Line prices and the cart total are on the phone, because it is showing a sale. Cost, margin, supplier and the customer's name and number are not sent to it at all. - **It never sees a full IMEI or serial**: A serialised unit shows as a six-character tail, enough to tell two devices apart and not enough to write down. - **The code goes stale on its own**: Ten minutes to pair, thirty minutes maximum for the session however busy it is, and three minutes of silence ends it. Reopening the panel voids the old code and issues a new one. - **One phone per till**: A pairing code can be claimed once. A second phone scanning the same code is refused rather than joining. - **You can disconnect it from the till**: Disconnect ends the session immediately, and so does finishing the sale. The phone can also disconnect itself. - **Only some roles can pair one**: Pairing is limited by role, and the whole feature can be switched off for the shop. - **A dropped connection does not lose scans**: Events are numbered and acknowledged, so reconnecting catches up on what was missed exactly once rather than replaying or skipping it. - **If the till goes away, the phone stops**: A phone that loses the till stops its camera and says so, instead of quietly queueing scans nothing will read. ##### What the phone scanner carries ##### Pair with a code on screen The till shows it, the phone camera reads it, and the phone confirms which till it is joining. ##### No app and no login An ordinary web page. The link leaves the address bar once paired, and dies with the tab. ##### Straight into the open sale Scan, adjust a quantity, remove a line. The till resolves every code against its own catalogue. ##### Camera, typing, or a photo If the camera will not read a damaged label, type it or photograph it: both go the same way. ##### Codes that expire Ten minutes to pair, thirty minutes at most, three minutes of silence to end it. ##### Role-gated and revocable Only some roles can pair a phone, the till can disconnect it, and the shop can switch it off entirely. ##### Survives a bad connection Numbered, acknowledged events, so a reconnect catches up exactly once. ##### Or use the scanner you own Any USB or Bluetooth scanner that types like a keyboard works at the desktop, alongside this. ##### The questions owners ask before handing over a phone **We'd rather buy a real scanner.** Then buy one: any USB or Bluetooth scanner that behaves like a keyboard works at the desktop, and nothing here replaces it. This is for the second counter, the stock delivery on the floor, and the week you need three tills instead of one. **What can someone see on that phone?** The sale in front of them: the lines, their prices and the total. Not cost, not margin, not the supplier, not the customer's name or number, and never a full IMEI: a serialised unit shows as a six-character tail. **Can they change a price or take the money?** No. The phone scans and adjusts quantities. Pricing, discounting and payment stay at the till under the role of whoever is on it. **What if they walk off with the phone still connected?** The session ends by itself: three minutes of silence, and thirty minutes maximum however active it is. You can also disconnect it from the till, and completing the sale ends it. **Does it work on an old phone?** It uses the browser's own barcode support where the phone has it and falls back to a decoder it loads on that page otherwise, which covers most iPhones. If the camera struggles with a damaged label, there is manual entry and a photo upload. **Where does the phone scanner work?** At the till: pair a phone from a QR code and every scan lands straight in the sale. A USB scanner that types like a keyboard works at the till as well. --- ## Purchase orders & receiving Source: https://slickcell.com/features/procurement #### What you ordered, what turned up, and what you owe for it Three numbers that should always agree and usually do not. An order, a delivery and a bill are separate events. This keeps them attached to each other so the difference is visible the day it happens, not at year end. ##### Where an order and its stock come apart None of this is carelessness. It is what happens when the order lives in a message thread and the stock lives in a spreadsheet. - An order is placed over WhatsApp and nobody else in the shop can see what was ordered. - Half the delivery arrives; the rest is remembered by one person until they are off sick. - Stock is booked in at the old price, so margin looks better than it is. - A supplier invoice arrives and nobody can tell which delivery it is for. - A faulty part goes back to the supplier and is never credited. - The same part is ordered twice because the first order was never recorded. ##### Order, receive, bill, settle Each step is a record that points at the one before it, so the trail from order to payment stays intact. - **Raise**: A purchase order against a supplier, with the lines and costs you expect. - **Send**: The order leaves as a document the supplier can work from. - **Receive**: Book in what actually arrived: the whole order or part of it. - **Cost**: Receiving recalculates the moving-average cost of what you now hold. - **Bill**: The supplier bill is the payable, raised against the receipt. - **Pay**: Payments settle against the bill, so the outstanding balance is real. - **Return**: Faulty or wrong stock goes back on a record, not on trust. Because receiving is what moves stock and sets cost, the shelf, the cost of goods and the supplier balance all change from the same event. ##### A part order, all the way through The records a stockroom actually works from. ##### Receive six of the ten you ordered Book in the quantity that arrived, line by line. The order stays open on the remainder and says so, Partially Received is its own state, not a note in a comment box. When the rest turns up, it is received against the same order. ##### Margin based on what you actually paid Receiving recalculates the moving-average cost of the stock you hold, so a price rise reaches your margin the moment it reaches your shelf. The old cost does not linger, and the profit report does not flatter you. ##### The supply chain stops being a memory test - **One place to look**: What is on order, what is part-delivered and what is still owed, visible to anyone on the counter, not just whoever placed the order. - **Supplier balances that are real**: Bills are the payable and payments settle against them, so an outstanding figure is something you can act on. - **Returns that get credited**: Stock sent back to a supplier is a record with a state, so it can be chased. - **Costs that stay honest**: Receiving sets cost. Margin reflects the price you actually paid for the stock you actually hold. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### The awkward ones, handled Ordering is easy. It is the exceptions that decide whether a system survives contact with a stockroom. - **Only part of the order arrives**: Receive the lines that came. The order moves to Partially Received and keeps the outstanding quantity, so it can be chased on what is actually missing. - **The rest is never coming**: An order can be closed short without destroying the record of what was ordered: the history of the shortfall survives. - **The price changed between order and delivery**: The receipt carries the cost you were actually charged, and the average cost of your stock moves with it. - **The bill covers more than one delivery**: A bill is its own record raised against what was received, rather than being forced to match one order exactly. - **Stock arrives faulty**: It goes to a return record against the supplier rather than onto the shelf, and stays visible until it is credited. - **A refunded item comes back from a customer**: It gets the outcome someone chooses at the refund: back to stock as new or used, held in Faulty Items to be inspected, or sent back to the supplier. Nothing goes back on sale by default. - **Two people order the same part**: Open orders are visible to the shop, not private to the person who raised them. None of these need a workaround. They are states the records already carry. ##### What purchasing carries ##### Purchase orders Raise an order against a supplier with the lines and costs you expect to pay. ##### Line-level receiving Book in what arrived, line by line, and leave the order open on the rest. ##### Goods received notes A receipt is its own record: what came, when, and against which order. ##### Supplier bills The bill is the payable. Payments settle against it, so outstanding means outstanding. ##### Returns to supplier Faulty and wrong stock goes back on a record that stays open until it is credited. ##### The trail stays joined Order, receipt, bill and payment each point at the one before it. ##### What stockroom managers ask **We only order from three suppliers. Is this overkill?** The number of suppliers is not what makes ordering go wrong: part-deliveries, price changes and uncredited returns are, and those happen with three suppliers as easily as with thirty. If your orders already reconcile perfectly, this will feel like paperwork. If you have ever paid for stock that never arrived, it will not. **Does receiving stock change my selling prices?** No. Receiving sets what the stock COST you, and recalculates the moving average across what you hold. Selling prices are yours to set and are never moved for you. **Can I raise a bill without a purchase order?** Yes. A bill can be posted on its own, because real supplier invoices do not always map neatly onto one order. It is still a payable that payments settle against. **What happens to a part-delivered order we know will never complete?** Close it short. The order keeps the record of what was ordered and what arrived, so the shortfall stays visible rather than being erased to tidy the list. **Do you connect to our suppliers directly?** If your supplier also uses SlickCell, yes. You can order against a catalogue they keep current, and they run their own orders, dispatch and discrepancies from their side. For everyone else, an order is a document you send them. --- ## Supplier network Source: https://slickcell.com/features/supplier-network #### B2B ordering system for phone parts, from your own stock screen Order from your supplier without either of you retyping it. SlickCell is a B2B ordering system for phone parts, screens, batteries and accessories: software for ordering from your own supplier, not a parts shop. When your supplier is on SlickCell, your purchase order arrives as their order, the same record, not a copy of it. ##### Where an order and its answer come apart None of this is anyone's fault. It is what happens when two businesses keep the same order in two places. - The order goes out by email and the reply comes back as a price you have to re-key. - Half the lines are in stock, so the order becomes a conversation instead of a document. - A price changed since last time and nobody notices until the bill. - The box arrives short and the only record of what was ordered is in a sent folder. - A part goes back and the credit is agreed verbally, then chased for a month. - You pay, and neither side is sure which invoices it settled. ##### How B2B ordering works between your shop and your supplier Each step writes to the next on both sides at once. Neither business is transcribing what the other one said. - **Connect**: Find the supplier in the directory and add them. The link is live immediately. - **Browse**: Their shared catalogue, with the prices and lead times they keep current. - **Order**: Raise the purchase order from your own stock screen; it lands as their incoming order. - **Quote**: They confirm, re-price or offer an alternative: each version kept, with its reason. - **Approve**: You accept the order, or accept some lines and cancel others. - **Reserve**: Approved stock is held against your order rather than sold twice. - **Dispatch**: Confirming the dispatch is the moment stock leaves their inventory. - **Receive**: You book in what arrived: accepted, damaged, missing or wrong, line by line. The two ends of that sequence are the point. What you ordered and what they read are one record, and what they sent and what you booked in are checked against it rather than against memory. ##### Ordered, received, and the gap between them The screen a stock manager actually works from. ##### What you ordered against what turned up Every line carries an ordered quantity and a received quantity, and they are allowed to disagree. A short delivery stays open and visible instead of being closed off as “received” so the paperwork can move on. ##### What you stop spending time on The saving is not the typing. It is the checking that the typing made necessary. - **One version of the order**: No sent folder, no portal login, no “can you confirm what I asked for”. - **Prices you did not transcribe**: Lines come off the supplier's own catalogue, so a stale price is their edit, not your typo. - **A short delivery that stays open**: Booking in what actually arrived leaves the rest outstanding, which is the only state you can chase from. - **Payments with a matching answer**: You record what you paid; they confirm they have it. Both sides can see which is which. - **The awkward conversation has a record**: Discrepancies and returns are a documented flow rather than a phone call nobody wrote down. ##### The orders that are not simple Any system handles a full delivery of everything you asked for. These are the ones that decide whether the numbers survive. - **They can only supply some of it**: The quotation comes back with the lines they can do, and you approve or cancel line by line. A partial order stays one order rather than becoming three. - **The price has gone up since last time**: A re-quote is a new version of the same quotation, with the reason for the revision recorded, so the change is visible instead of arriving on the bill. - **They offer a different part instead**: An alternative is a line-level response you can accept or decline, not a substitution that quietly appears in the box. - **It was agreed over the phone**: Off-platform approvals are recorded as such (the method, the person who agreed and the evidence) and a supplier cannot approve their own quotation. - **Stock is committed but not sent yet**: Approval reserves; dispatch is what removes stock from the supplier's inventory. The two are separate events, so reserved goods are not counted as gone. - **The delivery is split**: A dispatch can cover part of the order, and the rest stays outstanding against the same record. - **Something arrives damaged or wrong**: Receipt is per line and per outcome: accepted, damaged, missing, wrong item or rejected. Only accepted goods enter stock; the rest open a discrepancy instead. - **It has to go back**: A return is authorised through the discrepancy it belongs to, with the supplier's own return instructions attached to it. - **You paid but they have not seen it**: A payment you record is a claim until the supplier verifies it. Unverified claims never reduce a verified balance, so neither side is working from a number the other has not agreed. - **You want to stop ordering from them**: A supplier can be set to take no new orders, or the relationship closed, without deleting the history of what you already bought. Every one of those leaves an entry on the order's activity timeline, visible to both businesses. ##### Vendor-to-supplier ordering, connected ##### A directory of connected suppliers Find suppliers already on the platform and connect. Adding one from the directory takes effect immediately. ##### Catalogues they keep current Browse a supplier's shared items with their wholesale price, minimum order quantity, pack size and lead time. ##### They choose what you see Sharing can cover everything, a category, or a named list of items, with an expiry, and stock can show as an exact figure, a simple in-stock marker, or not at all. ##### Orders that arrive as orders Your purchase order becomes their incoming order. No portal, no PDF, no re-keying at either end. ##### Quotations with versions Every re-quote is kept with its reason, and you can approve some lines while cancelling others. ##### Reserve, then dispatch Approving holds the stock against your order. Confirming the dispatch is the single point at which it leaves their inventory. ##### Payment claim and verification You record the payment; they confirm it. A claim awaiting verification never quietly reduces the balance either of you is working from. ##### Messages against the thing they are about A conversation attaches to the relationship, the order or the discrepancy, so it is findable later by what it concerned. ##### Rate the orders you received Buyers rate a completed order across several categories, and the supplier can reply once. ##### Ordering from suppliers: what shops ask **Can I order parts from my supplier inside SlickCell?** Yes, when your supplier is connected. Your purchase order lands in the supplier's own account, they confirm or re-quote and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived without retyping it. **Our supplier isn't on it. Is this useless to us?** No. Purchase orders, receiving, bills and returns all work against your own supplier records whether or not the supplier uses SlickCell. That is the ordinary purchasing module and it is on every plan. The network is what happens when they are on it too: the order stops being an email. **How does a supplier get on it?** They sign up and choose “Supplier / wholesaler” when setting the shop up, which puts them on the Supplier Pro plan and turns on the supplier side of the product. They get everything a shop gets, plus the trade counter their shop customers order from. **Does connecting to a supplier let them see our business?** They see what a supplier sees: the orders you send them, the messages on those orders, and what you have paid against them. Your stock, your customers, your prices and your other suppliers are not part of it. **Can a supplier show different customers different things?** They can share their whole catalogue, one category, or a named list of items, with each grant given per customer and able to expire. They also choose whether you see an exact stock figure, just whether an item is available, or nothing. **What stops reserved stock being sold twice?** Approving an order reserves against it, and stock leaves the supplier's inventory only when a dispatch is confirmed. Reserving and sending are two separate events, which is what makes a reservation mean anything. **What if we pay and they say they haven't had it?** That is exactly the case this is built for. A payment you record is a claim; the supplier verifies it. Until they do it is visible to both of you as awaiting verification, and it does not move the verified balance either way. --- ## Reports & tax Source: https://slickcell.com/features/reports #### Repair shop reporting software Figures you can open, not figures you have to believe. SlickCell is repair shop reporting software that computes revenue, profit, VAT, stock and staff costs on the server from your full dataset, and every total opens onto the records underneath it. ##### Why nobody trusts the reports Not because the arithmetic is wrong. Because nothing tells you what went into it. - The dashboard, the invoice list and the tax return give three different totals for the same month. - Profit looks healthy because the cost of the parts was never counted against it. - Tax is worked out by dividing a total, so a mixed sale quietly reports the wrong figure. - A number looks wrong and there is no way to see what it is made of. - The report only covers what happened to be loaded on screen. - Month-end is a spreadsheet someone rebuilds by hand, every month. ##### From the event to the total The chain below is why the number can be opened. Each link is a record, not a calculation someone ran once. - **The event**: A sale, a repair, a part used, a payment taken. - **The line**: Its economics are persisted on the line, not recomputed later. - **The movement**: Stock used becomes a movement with a real cost. - **The ledger**: Money in and out lands on the account it belongs to. - **The total**: The server aggregates the whole dataset for your date range. - **The drill-down**: Open the total and see the records that produced it. Because cost of goods comes from actual stock movements and tax from the stored breakdown, profit is not an estimate laid over revenue. It is what is left after the things that actually happened. ##### A total, and what it is made of The screen an owner checks on a Monday. ##### Every headline opens onto its own records A revenue figure is not a number on a card. Open it and you get the invoices behind it, each with its own discount, tax and payment history. If a figure looks wrong, you can find out why in the report rather than in a spreadsheet. ##### What actually came in and went out Takings, manual income, expenses, supplier payments, refunds and trade-in payouts, day by day, with an opening and closing balance. It is the view that answers 'where did the cash go' without anyone reconstructing it. ##### Month-end stops being a rebuild - **One set of numbers**: The report, the invoice and the dashboard read the same ledger, so they cannot disagree about the same month. - **Profit after real costs**: Cost of goods comes from the stock that was actually consumed, not from a margin assumption. - **Tax from the breakdown**: Tax is read from what was stored on each line, never back-computed by dividing a total: which is where mixed-rate sales usually go wrong. - **Per branch or across the group**: Filter to one shop or read the whole group, from the same reports. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### Where reporting usually goes wrong These are the specific ways a shop's numbers stop adding up. - **A sale mixes tax rates**: Each line carries its own tax, and the report reads the stored breakdown. Nothing is inferred by dividing the total by a single rate. - **A used device sold on the margin scheme**: Margin tax is reported separately from standard tax rather than being blended into one figure that suits neither. - **A refund lands in a later month**: It reduces the period it actually happened in. Revenue for a closed month is not silently rewritten. - **A discount is given on the whole basket**: It is apportioned across the lines, so both revenue and tax reflect it. - **There are more rows than the page can hold**: Totals are computed on the server across the whole range, so a busy month is not quietly truncated to what loaded. - **A number still looks wrong**: Open it. The drill-down shows the records behind the total, which is usually enough to find the entry that caused it. This is general reporting, not tax advice. Check the rules that apply where you trade, or speak to your accountant. ##### Repair shop reports: profit and loss, VAT, stock and staff ##### Revenue and profit Takings and what is left after the cost of the goods that produced them. ##### VAT and refunds Read from the breakdown stored on each line, with margin-scheme VAT kept separate from standard-rated VAT. ##### The money account Daily money in and out, with opening and closing balances. ##### Inventory and stock counts What you hold, what it is worth, and what counts and trade-ins did to it. ##### Workforce Output per technician, and a real labour cost from the hours on each payroll run. ##### Drill-down on everything Open any headline figure and see the records that produced it. ##### Export to CSV Profit and loss, VAT, payments, the ledger, stock and payroll export from the report you are reading. ##### AI report summaries An AI summary reads your reports back in plain English, next to the figures it is drawn from. ##### Questions about repair shop reporting software **Are these figures calculated in my browser?** No, and that is deliberate. Each report is a server-side query over your full dataset for the date range you chose. Client-side aggregation can only ever total the rows that happen to be loaded, which is exactly how a busy month silently under-reports. **How is VAT worked out?** From the VAT breakdown stored on each line when the sale happened: never by dividing a total by a rate afterwards. That distinction matters the moment one sale contains items at different rates, or a used device sold under the VAT margin scheme. **Does profit include the cost of parts?** Yes. Cost of goods is computed from the stock movements that actually happened, so a repair's profit is net of the part that was fitted, at the cost you actually paid for it. **Can I see one branch on its own?** Yes. Every report can be filtered to a single branch or read across the whole group, from the same screen. **Can I give my accountant access without giving them everything?** Yes. The accountant role sees the financial reporting it needs and is kept out of the operational actions it does not: refunds, for instance, are not theirs to issue. **Does this replace my accountant?** No. It gives you numbers that reconcile and records that can be inspected, which is what makes your accountant's job cheaper. What the rules are where you trade is still their question to answer. **How do I get my figures to my accountant?** Export them. Profit and loss, VAT including the margin scheme, payments, the account ledger, stock and payroll export to CSV from the report you are reading. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. --- ## Cash drawer & cashbook Source: https://slickcell.com/features/cash-control #### What was in the drawer, what the day says, and the difference between them In SlickCell, the till opens on a float and closes on a count, and any gap is stated rather than absorbed. Then read every pound that moved, in and out, as a statement with a running balance. ##### How a drawer stops agreeing with anything Nobody decides to lose track of cash. It happens one unrecorded movement at a time. - The float goes in and nobody writes down how much. - A supplier is paid out of the till and the note goes missing. - A refund is handed over in cash and the day's takings quietly stop matching. - The till is counted, it is £12 out, and £12 is not worth an argument, so nothing is recorded. - A month later the shop is consistently short and there is nothing to look at. - The bank does not match the takings, and nobody can say which of the two is wrong. ##### A day, from float to close Each step writes to the same session, so the close has something to be measured against. - **Open**: Record the float that is actually in the drawer. - **Trade**: Sales, refunds, payouts and manual entries attach to the open session. - **Count**: At close, count the cash. It is required, not optional. - **Reconcile**: Expected against counted, with the difference shown rather than absorbed. - **Bank and card**: Count them too, or say you did not: the two are different answers. - **Close**: The session is stamped with every expected, actual and difference figure. - **Read the ledger**: The day joins a running statement of money in and money out. The point is the fourth step. A count that cannot disagree with anything is not a count. ##### Money in, money out, and what is left Not a profit statement. A statement of cash, which is a different and more immediate question. ##### Totals that open onto their records The reports read from the same ledger the till writes to, and a figure can be opened to see the records underneath it. A number you cannot open is a number you have to trust. ##### What you can answer at the end of a week - **Whether the drawer is right**: Not roughly. Counted against expected, with the difference kept. - **Where the difference lives**: A shop that is short on Tuesdays is a pattern. It only exists if the small differences were recorded. - **What actually left the business**: Supplier payments, refunds, trade-in payouts and expenses, in one place, in date order. - **Cash against card**: Counted separately, and allowed to be uncounted, because “we did not check the card machine” is a real answer. - **A balance that carries**: Each day opens on the closing position of everything before it, so a period is never read in isolation. ##### The awkward days - **Somebody took a payment before opening the till**: The movement is still attached to a session: one is opened for it, on a zero float, marked as having been opened automatically. The prompt to open the counter is there to stop that happening; the ledger is built so that when it does, nothing is left unaccounted. - **The count is out by a few pounds**: Record it. The difference is stored with the session rather than rounded away, which is the only reason next month's pattern will exist. - **Nobody checked the card machine**: Leave bank and online uncounted. That is stored as “not counted”, which is a different fact from “counted, and it was zero”. - **A supplier was paid from the drawer**: It reaches the session as a cash movement out, so the expected figure at close already knows about it. - **A refund was given in cash**: Same: the drawer is expected to be lighter, and the ledger shows it as money out rather than as missing revenue. - **Rent, wages or a one-off expense**: Recorded as a manual entry against a category, in or out, with the method it was paid by. Cash entries wait for an open counter like anything else. - **Two people want to close the till**: There is one open session per shop, so there is one close, and it is the one everyone is looking at. - **The accountant needs the figures**: Reading the ledger is open to owners, managers and the accountant role. Writing entries is owners and managers only, enforced by the database rather than by hiding a button. ##### What cash control carries ##### Open on a float One open session per shop, with the starting cash recorded rather than assumed. ##### Movements attach themselves Sales, refunds, supplier payments and trade-in payouts join the open session as they happen. ##### Close on a real count Counted cash is required. Bank and online can be counted, or explicitly left uncounted. ##### The difference is kept Expected, actual and difference are stored for cash, bank and online, and stay on the session. ##### A bank-statement view Opening balance, money in, money out and a running balance, newest first, day by day. ##### Open a day to see it Each day breaks down into the movements that made it, so a total is never the end of the trail. ##### Manual money in and out Rent, wages, an owner top-up, an insurance payout: categorised, dated and attributed. ##### Read and write are different rights Owners, managers and accountants can read it. Only owners and managers can write to it. ##### The questions owners ask about counting the till **We count the till at night anyway. What does this add?** Something to count against. A count on its own tells you what is in the drawer; a count against an expected figure tells you whether that is the right amount, and stores the difference, so a recurring shortfall becomes visible instead of being absorbed each night. **Does the till stop working if nobody opened the counter?** No, and it deliberately does not: refusing a customer's cash because of a bookkeeping step would be the wrong trade. You are prompted to open it, and if a cash movement happens anyway a session is opened for it automatically, on a zero float and marked as such. The ledger never ends up with cash that belongs to nothing. **Can I print a Z-report?** There is no printed close report. Closing produces a record you can open on screen: the expected and counted figures, the difference, the cash movements in that session and its event history. **Is this our profit and loss?** No, and the difference matters. This follows cash: what came in, what went out, what is left. Issuing an invoice does not appear here because no money moved, and wages only appear if you enter them. Profit is a separate report. **What if the card machine total does not match?** Count bank and card at close and the expected figures are there to compare against, with their own differences recorded. If nobody checked, leave them uncounted. That is stored as a distinct answer rather than as a zero. **Who can see it?** Owners, managers and the accountant role can read the ledger. Only owners and managers can add, edit or void an entry, and that is enforced on the server rather than by hiding controls. --- ## Workforce Source: https://slickcell.com/features/workforce #### Retail staff scheduling software for repair and electronics shops Let the shop use the system without handing over the shop. SlickCell is retail staff scheduling software built into the same system as your till, repairs and stock: weekly shifts, clock-in, leave and payslips, with roles the database enforces, so a Saturday assistant can book a repair in without seeing what the parts cost. ##### Where rotas, hours and access go wrong Usually not through malice. Through everyone having one login because splitting it was too much trouble. - Everyone signs in as the owner, so the audit trail says the owner did everything. - A technician can see the cost price of every part on the shelf. - Anyone can void an invoice, and nobody can say who did. - Hours are on a paper rota and re-typed into a spreadsheet at month end. - A pay rate changed mid-month and the whole month got paid at the new one. - Who is actually busy is a question you answer by walking to the bench. ##### From the weekly rota to a payslip The same record carries the person, what they may do, what they worked and what that cost. - **Add the person**: An employee record, with their documents kept against it. - **Give them a role**: One of five, deciding what they can see and do. - **Set their shifts**: Weekly start and finish times, changed from a date, never overwritten. - **Set the rate**: Pay rates are effective-dated, so a rise starts when it starts. - **Work the queue**: Jobs are assigned, and load is measured from real assigned work. - **Record attendance**: Hours and leave against the employee, with adjustments audited. - **Run payroll**: Attendance is priced at the rate in force on each day. - **Payslip**: A document produced from the run, and a cost the reports can see. Because the rate is effective-dated, a mid-month rise is applied from the day it took effect rather than being smeared across the whole month. ##### Permissions that are actually enforced The part most systems get wrong. ##### Owner, manager, technician, sales, accountant Each role gets its own view of each area (none, read, or full) and on top of that, whole groups of fields can be hidden. That is how a technician works a ticket without ever seeing what the part cost. The rules live in the database, so they hold whether the request comes from the app or not. ##### Who is busy, measured from actual jobs Technician load comes from the minutes of work actually assigned and still open, against the capacity of a day. It is a figure derived from the queue, so it moves when the queue moves. ##### Staff scheduling and payroll inputs in one system - **The audit trail names a person**: Because everyone signs in as themselves, 'who did this' has an answer. - **Costs stay behind a role**: Field-level visibility keeps cost and margin away from the roles that do not need them. - **Hours become a payroll input**: Attendance is priced against the rate that applied on the day, not the rate today. - **Workload is visible**: Who is loaded and who is free comes off the job queue rather than off a guess. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. ##### The ones that decide whether staff access works - **A technician needs to order a part but not see its cost**: Role permissions are per-area, and field groups are separate again, so the action and the figure are two different decisions. - **Someone's pay rate changes mid-month**: Rates are effective-dated. The days before the change are priced at the old rate and the days after at the new one. - **A leave balance was wrong and needs correcting**: The correction is an adjustment with a record behind it, not an edit to a number that leaves no trace. - **The accountant needs the figures but should not issue refunds**: That is exactly what the accountant role is: financial reporting without the operational actions. - **Someone leaves**: Their access is removed while their history stays intact: the work they did does not detach from the record. - **A manager covers a shift at another branch**: Membership is per-shop, so access follows where they actually work. ##### What workforce carries ##### Employee records The person, their details and their documents in one place. ##### Five roles, server-enforced Owner, manager, technician, sales and accountant: enforced by database policy. ##### Attendance and leave Hours and absence against the employee, with corrections recorded as adjustments. ##### Effective-dated pay rates A rise applies from the day it takes effect, not across the whole month. ##### Payroll runs and payslips Attendance priced into a run, producing a payslip and a cost the reports can see. ##### Output and load What each technician completed, and how loaded they are right now. ##### Staff scheduling and payroll: what owners ask **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. **What software can I use for rotas and timesheets?** Set each employee's weekly shifts with start and finish times, and staff clock in against them. SlickCell records attendance, lateness, absence and leave for every employee, including people who never sign in, and the hours feed the payroll run and the labour cost in your reports. **Are the permissions real, or just hidden buttons?** Real. The rules are mirrored into database policy, so a role that cannot do something cannot do it regardless of how the request arrives. Hiding the button is the presentation of the rule, not the rule. **Can I stop technicians seeing what parts cost?** Yes. Beyond area-level permissions there is field-group visibility, and cost and margin are one of those groups. A technician can consume a part on a job without the cost being on their screen. **We are four people. Do we need roles?** Four people is exactly where it starts to matter, because it is the size where everyone shares one login and the audit trail becomes useless. The value is not restriction, it is being able to answer who did something. **How is technician workload worked out?** From the work actually assigned and still open, measured in minutes against a day's capacity. It is derived from the job queue, so it reflects what is really on the bench. --- ## Multi-branch Source: https://slickcell.com/features/multi-branch #### Multi store POS for repair and electronics shops Three shops, one set of numbers, without merging the stock. SlickCell is multi store POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: each branch keeps its own till, its own stock tracked by IMEI or serial, its own staff and its own takings, and still rolls up into one view an owner can read. ##### Where a second shop breaks the system Most shop software is built for one location and grows a branch field later. - Each branch runs its own copy, and the group total is a spreadsheet someone builds on Sundays. - Stock shows as available when it is available at the other shop, forty minutes away. - A staff member covering another branch has to borrow someone's login. - Takings are compared between branches by exporting two reports and lining them up by hand. - One shop closes and unpicking its records takes a fortnight. - Nobody can see how the group is doing without asking each manager. ##### How multi store POS works in SlickCell Each branch is a shop in its own right. The group is what sits above them. - **A branch is a shop**: Its own stock, staff, tickets, takings and settings. - **Grouped by owner**: Branches belong to one organisation you control. - **People, not logins**: A person can belong to several shops under one account. - **Pick a shop**: You choose which branch you are working in when you sign in. - **Read one, or read all**: Every report filters to a branch or covers the group. - **Close one down**: Archiving checks what the branch still owes before it goes. Because a branch is a shop rather than a filter on shared rows, one branch's stock genuinely is not another's, and the group view is a roll-up rather than a rule that has to be remembered everywhere. ##### One dashboard for every branch Two different jobs, from the same records. ##### The group, without leaving the dashboard Switch the dashboard to all branches and the KPIs cover the group. Reports carry a branch filter throughout, so 'how did we do' and 'how did the High Road do' are the same screen with a different setting: not two different exports. ##### Archiving asks what is still outstanding first Before a branch can be archived, the server checks what it still holds (open jobs, unsettled money, stock, staff) and hands back the list, grouped, with a route to each one. Closing a shop becomes a checklist rather than a discovery process. ##### Multi location repair shop software, without shared stock - **Stock stays where it is**: Each branch's stock is its own, so availability means available here. - **One person, several shops**: Staff who cover more than one branch use their own account in each. - **Group numbers on demand**: The roll-up is a setting on the reports you already read, not a separate exercise. - **Closing down is controlled**: A branch cannot be quietly archived while it still holds open work or unsettled money. Multiple locations start on Professional at £59 a month excluding VAT, and each extra branch is £39 a month. Every feature is on every plan. ##### The ones that decide whether multi-site works - **A customer bought at one branch and comes back to another**: Each shop keeps its own records, so the branch that served them holds the history. Plan for this when you decide how to split shops. - **A manager covers two branches**: They hold membership of both under one account, and choose which they are working in at sign-in. - **The group needs one view for the accountant**: Reports read across the whole organisation, so the accountant does not need a login per shop. - **A branch still has open repairs when you want to close it**: The archive preflight lists them, grouped, with a route to each. It will not archive around them. - **Branch limits on the plan**: How many branches a plan allows is enforced server-side, so it cannot be exceeded by accident. - **One branch prices differently to another**: Settings are per shop, so pricing and tax rules do not have to be identical across the group. ##### What multi store POS carries ##### A branch is a real shop Its own stock, staff, takings and settings: not a column on shared rows. ##### Branch switcher Move between the shops you belong to without signing out. ##### All-branches view Dashboard KPIs and reports across the whole group, or filtered to one. ##### One person, several shops Membership is per shop, so staff who cover branches keep their own account. ##### Guarded archiving A server preflight lists what a branch still owes before it can be closed. ##### Limits enforced server-side Branch and team limits hold in the database, not just in the interface. ##### Multi store POS: what owners ask **Is a branch just a filter, or is the data really separate?** Really separate. A branch is a shop in its own right, grouped with your others by ownership, the same isolation that separates two unrelated businesses. That is why one branch's stock is genuinely not another's, rather than being a rule the software has to remember to apply everywhere. **Can I see all three shops at once?** Yes. The dashboard has an all-branches view, and every report carries a branch filter, so the group total and a single shop's numbers come from the same screen. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **What happens when we close a branch?** Archiving runs a server-side check first and hands back everything the branch still holds (open jobs, unsettled money, stock, staff) grouped, with a route to each. You clear them, then archive. **What should a multi store POS do for a repair shop?** Keep each branch's stock, staff, repairs and takings separate, and still show the owner the whole group. In SlickCell every branch is its own shop with its own till and device stock by IMEI or serial, and the dashboard and reports read one branch or all of them. **Do our shops share customers and stock?** Each shop keeps its own customers, stock and purchasing, so every branch runs cleanly on its own figures, while group reports read across the whole organisation for you and your accountant. --- ## Pricing Source: https://slickcell.com/pricing #### Repair shop software pricing Pricing that scales with the shop. Every SlickCell feature is included on every plan: plans differ by team size, locations, discounts and support. Start the trial yourself: no sales call, no card, and nobody has to ring you back before you can look at it. ##### Four plans, one feature set Flat monthly pricing, never per device and never per transaction. Every plan includes repair tickets, point of sale, invoicing, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, purchasing, staff rotas and reports. **Starter**: £39/month or £390/year, excluding VAT. One location, everything you need to open up and trade. - Every SlickCell feature included - 3 app-access users - 5 employee profiles - Single location - Hosted in London - Manual one-off discounts - Standard email support **Professional**: £59/month or £590/year, excluding VAT. Multiple locations, discount rules and priority processing. - Every SlickCell feature included - 10 app-access users per branch - 15 employee profiles per branch - Multiple locations - Discount rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns - Priority large-job processing - Custom domain - Priority email support - Additional branches £39.00/mo each **Supplier Pro**: £99/month or £990/year, excluding VAT. Adds Supplier Operations: sell to other shops from your own catalogue. - Every SlickCell feature included - 15 app-access users per branch - 25 employee profiles per branch - Multiple locations - Supplier Operations included - Discount rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns - Priority large-job processing - Custom domain - Priority support - Additional locations £39.00/mo each **Enterprise**: price on application. Tailored to your organisation. - Every SlickCell feature included - Unlimited app-access users - Unlimited employee profiles - Unlimited locations - Supplier Operations included - Discount rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns - Super-fast large-job processing - Custom domain - Separate dedicated database - Dedicated account manager - Priority or contractual support #### What actually changes between plans Team size, locations, discounts, processing priority and support: nothing else. | | Starter | Professional | Supplier Pro | Enterprise | |---|---|---|---|---| | Every SlickCell feature included | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | App-access users | 3 | 10 per branch | 15 per branch | Unlimited | | Employee profiles | 5 | 15 per branch | 25 per branch | Unlimited | | Locations | Single | Multiple | Multiple | Unlimited | | Additional location / branch | No | £39.00/mo each | £39.00/mo each | Included | | Discounts | Manual one-off | Rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns | Rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns | Rules, promo codes & automatic campaigns | | Large-job processing | No | Priority | Priority | Super-fast | | Custom domain | No | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Data hosted in London | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Supplier Operations | No | No | Yes | Yes | | Separate dedicated database | No | No | No | Yes | | Dedicated account manager | No | No | No | Yes | | Support | Standard email | Priority email | Priority | Priority or contractual | #### How much does repair shop software cost? SlickCell costs £39 a month for one location, £59 for several and £99 with Supplier Operations, excluding VAT. Paying yearly costs ten months instead of twelve. Extra branches are £39 a month each. There are no per-device or per-transaction charges, and no card is needed to start the 14-day trial. #### Repair shop software pricing questions Short answers. If yours isn't here, book a demo and ask directly. ##### Repair shop software pricing questions Short answers. If yours isn't here, book a demo and ask directly. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create the account, choose a plan and use every feature for 14 days without entering card details. You add a card only if you decide to stay. **Is there a free trial?** Yes: fourteen days on the plan you choose, with every feature available. You are trialling the same product a paying shop uses, not a cut-down version, so you can put real repairs and real stock through it and see whether the numbers come out right. **Is there a free plan?** Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with every feature switched on, and no card. After that, plans start at £39.00 a month excluding VAT, flat: no per-transaction fees, no per-device charges and nothing capped that you need to trade. **What is the difference between app users and employee profiles?** App-access users are the people who sign in and use the system. Employee profiles are the staff records you keep (for rotas, attendance and job assignment) whether or not that person logs in. A technician who never touches the till needs a profile, not a seat. **How much does an extra branch cost?** Additional locations are £39.00 a month each on Professional and on Supplier Pro, excluding VAT. Starter is a single-location plan. Enterprise includes additional locations in its pricing. Each branch keeps its own stock and staff under one login. **Can I change plan later?** Yes. Plans are a ladder rather than separate products, so moving up or down changes your team size, locations and support level without changing the software you are using. Every feature is on every plan, so you never lose a capability by moving. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **Do you charge per transaction?** No. There is no per-transaction charge, no per-device charge and no percentage of your takings. The plan price is flat, so a busy month costs the same as a quiet one and you can budget for it without checking your volume first. **Can I export all my data?** Yes, at any time. Repairs, stock, payments, profit and loss, tax and payroll reports export to CSV from the screen they are on, so your records go with you. **Where is SlickCell data hosted, and is it secure?** In London, on every plan. The database is encrypted in transit and at rest, every shop is sealed off by row-level security on every table, staff roles are enforced by the database, two-factor sign-in is available on every account, and changes are written to an append-only audit trail. --- ## Free repair shop software, and the no-card trial Source: https://slickcell.com/free-repair-shop-software #### Free repair shop software: what it really costs Free plans, open-source systems and spreadsheets each cost something other than a subscription. Here is what each one asks of you, and how to try SlickCell for 14 days with no card. ##### Three kinds of free repair shop software Free repair shop software usually means one of three things: a free plan of a hosted system, an open-source system you install and run yourself, or a spreadsheet. Each can work for a shop that is starting out, and each has a cost that is paid in something other than a subscription: a limit you will reach, a server you have to look after, or steps you type twice. SlickCell is paid repair shop software with a free start: a 14-day trial you begin yourself, with no card, on the plan you choose and with every feature switched on. After that, Starter is £39 a month excluding VAT. - **A free plan of hosted software**: Someone else's system with a limit on it, usually on repairs a month, users or features. The paid plan is the way past the limit, so check the price you will pay when you reach it, and whether your records export if you leave. - **Open-source repair shop management software**: The licence is free. The server, the domain, backups, security updates and fixing it when an update breaks are yours, and so is the time. If nobody in the shop wants to run a server, that time comes off the bench. - **A spreadsheet or free generic tools**: A spreadsheet holds a list well and costs nothing. It does not reserve a part to a job, take a payment, count a till or work out VAT, so those steps happen somewhere else and get typed twice. Running a computer, phone or electronics repair shop? See ##### What to check before you choose free software - **Can you export everything?**: Repairs, stock, customers and payments, as files you can open elsewhere. - **What is the limit, and what happens at it?**: Repairs a month, users, locations. - **Where is the data held?**: And who backs it up. - **Does it do your VAT?**: Including the margin scheme if you sell second-hand devices. - **Is there a till?**: Deposits, part payments and split tender against the job. - **Are devices tracked one by one?**: By IMEI or serial, with their own cost. - **Can staff have their own logins?**: With roles that limit what each person can do. ##### SlickCell: a 14-day trial with no card, every feature included No sales call and no card. Nobody has to ring you back before you can look at it. - **Pick a plan**: Starter, Professional or Supplier Pro, monthly or yearly. - **Create your login**: Name, email and a password. - **Enter the code**: A six-digit code from your email. - **Set up the shop**: Country, currency, tax and opening hours. - **Book a repair in**: Your first ticket, on real stock. - **Decide**: When the 14 days end, choose how to pay, or stop. There is nothing to cancel. Every answer above is SlickCell's: exports to CSV from the screen you are on, hosted in London, UK VAT and the margin scheme, a till, every device by IMEI or serial, and staff roles enforced by the database. ##### Questions about free repair shop software **Is SlickCell free?** Free for the first 14 days, with every feature and no card. After that, Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. When the trial ends you choose how to pay, or you stop. There is nothing to cancel. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create the account, choose a plan and use every feature for 14 days without entering card details. You add a card only if you decide to stay. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Is there open-source repair shop software?** Yes. There are open-source repair systems you can install on your own server. The licence is free; the hosting, backups, security updates and support are yours to arrange. SlickCell is hosted for you in London, runs in any browser and has nothing to install. **What happens when the trial ends?** You choose a plan and add a way to pay, or you stop. Nothing is charged during the 14 days and there is nothing to cancel. Your shop, stock and repairs stay as you left them when you carry on. **Can I export all my data?** Yes, at any time. Repairs, stock, payments, profit and loss, tax and payroll reports export to CSV from the screen they are on, so your records go with you. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **Can I see it before I sign up?** Yes. Book a demo and we walk through your own workflow on the real screens, or start the trial and put a real repair through it. --- ## Security Source: https://slickcell.com/security #### Your shop's data, hosted in London and locked to your shop Customer records, unlock codes, stock and takings are the most sensitive things a repair shop holds. Here is exactly how SlickCell protects them, on every plan, from the day you sign up. ##### In London, encrypted, and separate from every other shop - **Hosted in London, on every plan**: Your shop's database runs in a London data centre. That is the same on Starter as on Enterprise: UK data residency is not an upgrade you have to ask for. - **Encrypted in transit and at rest**: Every connection to SlickCell is encrypted with TLS, and the database is encrypted at rest with AES-256. That covers the app, the till, the phone scanner and the customer tracking page. - **Every shop sealed off from every other**: Row-level security is switched on for every table in the database. Each query is checked against the shop you belong to by the database itself, so another shop's records cannot be reached from the app, from the API or by a changed link. The rule is covered by automated database tests. ##### Staff see what their job needs, and nothing more - **Roles enforced by the database**: Owner, manager, technician, sales and accountant each see and change only what the role allows. The rule lives in the database, not just in hidden buttons, so a permission cannot be sidestepped from outside the screen. - **Money-moving actions limited**: Voids and write-offs are limited to owners and managers. Editing a sold unit or handing a device over unpaid asks for a reason, and the reason is kept with the record. - **Two-factor sign-in**: Every account can add an authenticator app, so a stolen password alone does not open the shop. Switching it off needs both the password and a current code. - **Customer unlock codes kept apart**: Device passcodes are stored separately from the customer record and are revealed only to the roles that work on the device. Every reveal is logged with who looked and when. - **Automatic sign-out**: A till left open signs itself out after the period of inactivity you choose, with a warning first. ##### A record of every change, and your data always yours - **Append-only audit trail**: Changes to repairs, stock, customers, invoices and payments are written to an audit trail with who made them and when. Entries are added, never edited, and only owners and managers can read them. - **Paid invoices cannot be rewritten**: Once an invoice is settled it is locked. A refund or correction is a new entry that points at the original, so the history your accountant reads is the history that happened. - **Deleted records can be restored**: Deleting a record moves it to the bin first, where it can be brought back. Nothing important disappears because of one wrong click. - **Export whenever you like**: Repairs, stock, payments, profit and loss, tax and payroll reports export to CSV at any time, from the screen you are already on. Your records are yours to take to your accountant, or anywhere else. ##### No card numbers held, and eyes on the system around the clock - **We never store a card number**: Your subscription is paid on the secure pages of a PCI DSS Level 1 payment provider. At the till, card takings are recorded by amount and method on the sale, so no customer card data ever passes through SlickCell. - **Monitored around the clock**: Errors in the app and on the server are reported to us the moment they happen, with customer personal data stripped out before the report is sent. ##### What shop owners ask us **Where is SlickCell data hosted?** In London. Your shop's database runs in a London data centre on every plan, including Starter. UK data residency is standard, not an enterprise add-on, and the data is encrypted in transit (TLS) and at rest (AES-256). **Which companies process my shop's data?** Your shop's database is hosted in London on every plan. The full list of the service providers that process data for SlickCell, with what each one does and where, comes with our data processing agreement, which any customer can ask for at hello@slickcell.com. Customers are given 30 days' notice before a provider is added or changed. **Can another shop see my data?** No. Row-level security is enabled on every table, so the database itself checks every request against the shop you belong to. Another shop's records cannot be reached from the app, from the API, or by editing a link, and automated database tests cover that rule. **Who can see a customer's unlock code?** Only the roles that work on the device. Passcodes are stored apart from the customer record, an accountant login never sees them, and every reveal is logged with the name of the person and the time. **Does SlickCell store card details?** No. Your subscription is paid on a PCI DSS Level 1 payment provider's own pages, and card sales at the till are recorded by amount and method only. Keep the card machine you already have: SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **Does SlickCell support two-factor authentication?** Yes. Any account can add an authenticator app, so a password on its own is not enough to sign in, and turning it off needs the password and a current code. **Can I get my data out?** Yes, at any time. Repairs, stock, payments and every report export to CSV from the screen they are on, so your accountant gets the same figures the app shows, and moving your records never depends on asking us. --- ## Integrations Source: https://slickcell.com/integrations #### What SlickCell connects to Your card machine, your printers, your scanners, your suppliers and your accountant. Everything on this page works on every plan, from the day you sign up. - Each section says what the connection does and where you find it in the product. ##### Your own card machine - Keep the card machine you already have, from whichever provider gives you the best rate. Take the payment on the terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed, so the sale, the receipt and the day's report agree. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. ##### Your subscription, on secure payment pages - Your SlickCell plan is billed through a PCI DSS Level 1 payment provider. Checkout, the card on file, plan changes, cancellation and reactivation all run on the provider's own secure pages, so your card details are never held by us. ##### Exports for your accountant - Profit and loss, VAT including the margin scheme, payments, the account ledger, stock and payroll export to CSV from the report you are reading. Your accountant works from exactly the figures the app shows, and customer statements download as PDF. ##### Your suppliers, connected - Suppliers on SlickCell publish a live catalogue to the shops they serve. Your purchase order lands directly in their account: they confirm or re-quote, reserve and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived. Suppliers who are not on the platform receive the same order as a PDF by email. ##### Email and SMS updates to customers - Ready-for-collection notices, diagnosis updates and reminders go to customers by text or email from the job, on templates each shop can edit, and every message is kept on the customer record. Nothing to set up. - Every receipt and repair label also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, so customers can check progress themselves without an app or a login. ##### Google sign-in - Staff can sign in with a Google account instead of a password. Access inside the product is still decided by the role the shop gave that person; Google only proves who they are. ##### Barcode scanning: USB, camera, or a paired phone - Any USB barcode scanner that types into the till works as it would in any other program. And a staff phone can be paired to the till from a QR code on screen and used as a scanner for the open sale, with no app to install and no hardware to buy. ##### Stock import from CSV - Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV files as three separate imports, with column mapping, supplier matching and a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Bring your stock over from a spreadsheet or straight from your old system. ##### Printing and PDF: receipts, invoices, tickets and labels - One document template prints as an A4 page, an 80mm or 58mm receipt roll, or a repair label on stock sizes from 50 by 25 up to 80mm, and the same document downloads as a PDF. Printing goes through the browser's own print dialog, so any printer the computer can already print to will work. SlickCell itself installs nothing. ##### What shops ask about connections **Does it work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed, so the sale, the receipt and the report agree. SlickCell takes no cut of your takings, so you choose the card provider with the best rate. **How do I get my figures to my accountant?** Export them. Profit and loss, VAT including the margin scheme, payments, the account ledger and payroll export to CSV from the report you are reading, so your accountant works from exactly the figures the app shows. **Which receipt printers work?** Any printer the computer can already print to. Receipts, A4 invoices, repair tickets and labels come off one template and print through the browser at A4, 80mm, 58mm or label sizes. SlickCell itself installs nothing: the printer uses its normal driver. **How do customers get repair updates?** By text or email from the job, on a template, with every message kept against the customer. Their receipt also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, so they can check the status without ringing the shop. **Do I need a barcode scanner?** No. Any staff phone becomes the scanner: pair it to the till from a QR code on screen and every scan lands in the open sale, with no app to install. A USB scanner or the device camera works too. --- ## Hardware: scanners, printers, labels and drawers Source: https://slickcell.com/hardware #### The hardware a repair or electronics shop needs for SlickCell SlickCell runs in the browser, so it works with standard shop hardware rather than a list of approved models. Here is what each piece must do, what to look for on a listing, and a few that meet it. A barcode scanner works if it types the code like a keyboard and presses Enter. A receipt printer works if your computer can already print to it on 80 or 58 mm paper. A label printer works if its driver can be set to the label size SlickCell prints. Your card machine stays your own: take the payment on it and record it at the till. Any staff phone can scan as well, with nothing to install. Below are the kinds of hardware a shop needs and what to check before you buy. #### Barcode scanner - Keyboard (HID) mode, over a USB cable, a USB dongle or Bluetooth - An Enter (carriage return) after each scan; the manual shows how to switch it on if it is off - 1D for SlickCell's own labels; 2D if you also want to scan QR codes #### A phone as a scanner #### Receipt printer - 80 mm or 58 mm paper width - A driver for your computer: Windows, macOS, or both - USB, or Ethernet if it sits away from the till - A cash drawer port (RJ11 or RJ12), if you want a drawer that opens when a receipt prints #### Label printer - Direct thermal, so there is no ribbon to buy - Die-cut labels in one of the sizes above - A driver where you set the label size; 203 dpi is enough, 300 dpi for very small barcodes #### Cash drawer - An RJ11 or RJ12 cable, rated for your receipt printer's drawer port (usually 24 V) - A key lock, for when you need it open without printing #### Card machine #### A4 printer #### Computer or tablet ##### What shops ask about hardware **What hardware do I need?** A computer, tablet or phone with a modern browser. Receipts, A4 invoices, repair tickets and shelf labels print from one template on a thermal or A4 printer, any staff phone can scan barcodes into the sale, and card payments go through the card machine you already have. **Can SlickCell open my cash drawer?** A drawer that connects to your receipt printer opens when the printer's own driver is set to open it on print; SlickCell keeps the float, the cash in and out and the count at close. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **Does SlickCell run on an iPad?** Yes. SlickCell is web-based and runs in any modern browser on a computer, tablet or phone, so there is nothing to install on the iPad. Sign in at the counter and the same shop, repair queue and till are there as on any other device. --- ## Moving from another system Source: https://slickcell.com/migration #### Moving your stock across, without a leap of faith The real question is not whether the software is good. It is whether you can get out of what you are using now, and what happens to the count if the import goes wrong. ##### Export, map, preview, commit The preview is the part that matters. Nothing enters your stock on the strength of a file nobody has looked at. - **Export what you have**: A spreadsheet out of your current system. - **Split by type**: Parts, accessories and devices are three imports. - **Add references**: One IMEI, serial or shop reference per device unit. - **Preview**: See exactly what the import would do before it runs. - **Read the warnings**: Errors and oddities are listed separately. - **Commit**: You choose whether existing stock is updated. Most of the work is the first two steps, and most of the risk is removed by the fourth. A shop moving over usually spends longer tidying its own spreadsheet than running the import. ##### What the import actually does The same ten rules published on the inventory page: one list, so the two cannot disagree. - **Three separate imports**: Parts, accessories and devices come in as three separate imports, because they are three different kinds of thing with three different shapes. - **Quantity for parts, references for devices**: Parts and accessories are imported with a quantity. Device quantity is derived from the unit references you supply, not entered as a number. - **One unit per reference**: Each device unit corresponds to one IMEI, serial number or shop reference. Two units cannot share one reference. - **The reference can be partial**: A full IMEI, a serial number, the last four or five digits, or an internal shop reference are all accepted, stored as free text, with no format or checksum rule to fight. - **Prices in pounds**: Costs and selling prices are entered in pounds, the way they appear on your supplier's invoice. - **Suppliers by ID**: A supplier is selected by its supplier ID, so the same name spelled three ways does not become three suppliers. - **Preview before commit**: You see what the import will do before anything is written. Nothing lands in your stock on the strength of a file you have not looked at. - **Warnings and errors are separate**: Rows that cannot be imported and rows that merely look odd are shown apart, so a genuine problem is not buried among things that are simply unusual. - **Update mode is explicit**: Whether the import updates existing stock is a choice you make deliberately, not a default that quietly overwrites what is already there. - **No barcode required**: The approved import format does not require a barcode, so a spreadsheet from an older system is enough to get started. ##### How shops move over without a gap Stock first, checked against the shelf, while your old system finishes what it started. - **Preview before anything is written**: Every import shows exactly what it will create, with errors and warnings listed separately, before a single record is saved. The preview is the decision point: check it, then commit. - **Start small, then do the rest**: Nothing forces you to bring everything over at once. Importing one category, checking it against the shelf and then continuing is slower on paper and faster in practice. - **Finish open jobs where they started**: Part-finished repairs run to completion on your old system while new work starts in SlickCell, so nothing is moved halfway through a repair. - **A clean set of books from day one**: Your trading history stays in the system that produced it, where your accountant keeps working from it for the closed period, and SlickCell starts clean from your go-live day. - **Every unit enters stock as itself**: If an export has the same IMEI, serial or shop reference on two rows, the preview flags it, so each device arrives as one unit with one reference. - **Prices read as pounds**: Costs and selling prices import as pounds. A cell holding text, a stray symbol or a blank is listed for you to fix rather than guessed at. Bring your export to a demo call and we will walk through exactly how it maps before you buy anything. ##### Or leave us a number and we will move it for you None of the above has to be your job. Tell us what you are running now, and the moving is ours. - **We call you first**: A short call about what you run now, what is actually in it, and what is worth bringing over. You do not need a file in front of you to have it. - **You send what you can get out**: Whatever your current system will give you. If getting it out is the hard part, that is the part we help with rather than the part we wait on. - **We bring it in and read the warnings**: We run it, work through what the preview flags, and check the result against what you told us is on the shelf. You are not the one reading the error list. - **You get it back ready to trade on**: Stock, suppliers and device units in place, so the first thing you do in it is serve a customer rather than type. We walk you through what came across and what did not. - **No migration fee**: There is no setup charge and no separate migration cost on any plan. Moving your stock across is part of the subscription rather than an extra. Your trading history stays where it is. We move the stock you sell from, not the books your accountant has already closed. ##### What shops ask before switching Straight answers about the switch. **Can you just do it for me?** Yes. Leave your number on this page and we will call, take whatever your current system gives you, bring it in, work through the warnings and hand the shop back with its stock, suppliers and device units in place. There is no charge for it on any plan. What we will not do is guess how long your file needs before we have seen it. **Can I bring my existing stock across?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import separately, prices are entered in pounds and suppliers are selected by supplier ID. A device reference can be a full IMEI, a serial number, the last few digits or your own shop reference, and you preview what the import will do before anything is written. **What if my file has mistakes?** The preview catches them first. You see exactly what would be written, with errors and warnings listed separately, before anything is saved. Import one category, check it against the shelf, then bring over the rest. **Do my device IMEIs have to be complete?** No. A full IMEI, a serial number, the last four or five digits or your own internal shop reference are all accepted, stored as free text. There is no format or checksum rule to satisfy, so a partial reference from an older system is fine. **What happens to my open repairs and old invoices?** Finish part-finished repairs on your old system and keep its invoices there for your accountant's closed period. Your stock comes across, new repairs start in SlickCell from go-live, and the two never overlap. **How long does moving over take?** Most of the effort is exporting and tidying your own data rather than running the import. We would rather look at your actual file and tell you than quote an average that turns out not to describe your shop. **Can I try it before committing everything?** Yes. Every plan has a fourteen-day trial, and nothing requires you to import your whole shop on day one. Bringing one category across and checking it is the sensible way in. --- ## About Source: https://slickcell.com/about #### Built for the shop, not the demo SlickCell exists because the software a repair shop can actually buy tends to be a till with repairs bolted on, or a ticket system that knows nothing about money. #### The gap between the job and the money - Walk into a busy repair shop and you will usually find three systems running at once: a board or a notebook for the jobs, a till for the money, and somebody's memory for everything in between. Each one works. The trouble is what happens where they meet. - A deposit gets taken and noted on a ticket, but never against the bill. A part comes out of the drawer and the count is corrected at the weekend, if anyone remembers. A customer pays most of it and the rest becomes a discount because that is the only field that fits. None of this is carelessness. It is what happens when the record of the work and the record of the money are two different records. - So the product was built around one idea rather than a feature list: a part used should reduce stock, that movement should land in cost of goods, cost of goods should land in the month's profit, and none of it should be changeable without leaving a trace. Everything else follows from that. ##### Three principles They sound obvious. Most software for this trade breaks at least one of them. - **Money must reconcile**: A part payment is a balance, not a discount. Change is not revenue. Once money is settled, history gets corrected by adding to it rather than by overwriting it. - **Stock must match the shelf**: Quantity is derived from real units, not typed. A device is an individual record with its own cost and history, because that is what it is in the drawer. - **Honest numbers**: A figure should open onto the records that produced it. If a total cannot be traced back to the invoices behind it, it is a guess with a decimal point. ##### Where the work is going Directions rather than dates. - **The supplier side, deepened**: Ordering between two businesses that both use SlickCell is live, and suppliers run their own orders, catalogues and dispatches on it. Next comes the wholesaler's day on one screen: every order and delivery at once, with trade figures that read at a glance. - **The trade's own tools**: Calculators and guides for the parts of the job that are genuinely hard to get right, margin-scheme VAT being the obvious one, built to be useful whether or not you ever buy anything. - **Listening to shops that say no**: The objections that come out of sales conversations change the product and the copy. A shop explaining why this would not work for them is more useful than one saying it looks good. ##### Who you are dealing with In full, so you can check it before you trust it. - **SlickCell, said "Slick Sell"**: One word, two capital letters. If you searched for Slicksell or Slick Cell, you found the right company. - **Registered in England and Wales**: SLICK CELL LTD, company number 16727691, registered office 26 Adelphi Street, Preston, England, PR1 7BE. The entry on the public register is linked below. - **Based in Preston, hosted in London**: The company is in Lancashire and the data is in a London region, which is also where it stays. Neither of those is a detail you should have to ask for. - **Reachable by a person**: Phone +44 1772 880333 or email hello@slickcell.com during UK shop hours. Not a ticket queue with an auto-reply. - **Open to partners**: Shops and parts distributors who introduce other shops earn free months of their own subscription, matched by hand and paid in months rather than money. --- ## Partner programme Source: https://slickcell.com/partners #### Introduce a shop, and stop paying for months Suppliers know which of their customers are fighting their software. Shop owners know the other shops in town. Introduce one, and their subscription pays for yours. ##### Two kinds of business are in a position to introduce a shop The offer is the same for both. What differs is who you already have a reason to talk to. - **If you supply repair shops**: Parts distributors and wholesalers with a book of trade customers. You sell to these shops every week, and you already know which of them are fighting their software. Introducing one costs you a sentence in a conversation you were having anyway. - **If you run a repair shop**: You know the other shops in your town, and the ones you pass work to when a job is out of your line. A shop you introduce comes off your own bill, on exactly the same terms a distributor gets. You do not have to be a supplier to take part. One requirement, and it is the same for both: you have a SlickCell subscription of your own. What you earn is credit against it, so there has to be a bill for it to come off. ##### Five steps, and you only do the first From naming a shop to skipping a bill, with nothing to install and no code to hand out. - **Tell us**: Send the shop's name and who to expect, before they sign up. - **They start**: They sign up and run the fourteen-day trial like anyone else. - **They pay**: Their first paid month is the month your credit is earned. - **It banks**: Credit adds up and does not expire. Three shops is a free month. - **You skip a bill**: Say the word before it goes out and that month is not charged. A person matches every introduction and applies every free month. There is nothing for you to log in to and no code to hand out. #### Every shop you introduce is worth a month of what they pay Not a share of it, and not a fraction of your own bill. A shop that signs up through your link and pays for Professional earns you £59 against your next invoice. | | One shop | Three shops | Ten shops | |---|---|---|---| | Starter, £39 a month | £39 | £117 | £390 | | Professional, £59 a month | £59 | £177 | £590 | | Supplier Pro, £99 a month | £99 | £297 | £990 | | Enterprise, priced individually | £99 | £297 | £990 | ##### The rules, in full, before you ask Thirteen of them. Several are limits rather than benefits, and those are not kept for the bottom. - **It has to be a shop that was not already coming**: A business that is not already a SlickCell customer, and not one of your own locations under another name. A shop that had already started a trial before you introduced them does not count, because they no longer have a first payment for it to count on. - **Share your link, or tell us the name**: Your link and its QR code are in the app under Settings → Referrals, and a shop that signs up through either is matched to you automatically. If you would rather tell us who to expect, the form still works and a person still reads it. Both mechanisms earn the same. - **It counts once they are paying**: The fourteen-day trial does not count. A shop earns you their first month's plan price the first time they actually pay for a plan, and nothing before that. - **They have ninety days to start paying**: From signing up through your link to their first payment. A shop that trials, leaves, and comes back a year later is not one you introduced any more. - **A shop earns once**: The reward is for bringing a shop, not for keeping one. A shop you introduced earns on its first paid month and does not earn again, so more credit next quarter means another shop rather than the same one. - **It counts at the plan they start on**: A shop that starts on Starter and moves up later does not earn again on the upgrade. Whichever plan they first pay for is the one the reward is worked out from. Enterprise is priced individually, so a shop on it earns the Supplier Pro rate. - **Fourteen days before it is yours**: A reward is held for fourteen days after the shop's first payment. If that payment is refunded inside those fourteen days you earn nothing, because the shop never really paid. It is a holding period, not a delay in applying it. - **If they are refunded later, it comes back in proportion**: A refund after the holding period takes back the same share of the reward as the share of the payment refunded. A full refund takes all of it. We will not take back more than the shop got back. - **It comes off your next bill**: Credit is added to your SlickCell account and the next invoice takes as much of it as it is worth, carrying the rest to the one after. It covers whatever that invoice covers, additional locations included. It does not expire and it is not paid out in cash. - **If you pay yearly**: It comes off your next annual invoice, in the same way. There is no separate arrangement and nothing is added to the end of your term. - **One shop, one introducer**: If two partners introduce the same shop it counts for whoever told us first, and we will tell you which it was. It makes no difference whether they are a supplier or another repair shop, or whether one used a link and the other a form. - **We may hold one while we look at it**: An introduction that looks like the same business twice, the same owner, the same company number, the same card, is held and read by a person before anything is paid. If it is genuine it is released and earns exactly as it would have. You cannot introduce yourself. - **If we change it**: We can change the programme or close it, and we will give notice before we do. Credit you have already earned stays yours. We will not take back credit you were told you had, other than the refund rule above. None of that depends on what the shop does with you afterwards. The reward follows their subscription and nothing else. ##### What people ask before signing up to this Including the one thing you need before you can take part, whichever side you are on. **Who is this for?** Two groups. Parts distributors and wholesalers who sell to repair shops, and repair shops themselves. Both are built around a relationship you already have rather than around advertising: you are not being asked to find strangers, you are being asked to mention us to businesses you already speak to. **Do I need to be a SlickCell customer myself?** Yes, and it is the one hard requirement. What you earn is free months of your own subscription, so there has to be a subscription to take them off. If you are not on the platform yet, the fourteen-day trial is the place to start, and anything you introduce while you are on trial still counts once you are paying. **Is the partner programme worth anything if I can only introduce two or three shops?** Yes. One shop is worth something on its own: £39 if they pay for Starter, £59 for Professional, £99 for Supplier Pro. Two or three is a month you largely do not pay for, so the arithmetic starts working at two or three rather than at thirty. What it will not do is pay you, the reward only ever cancels your own bill. The plan prices it follows are on the pricing page. **How many shops can I introduce?** As many as you like, and there is no ceiling on what you can earn. Credit that is worth more than your next bill is not lost, the invoice takes what it is worth and the rest waits for the one after. Because a shop earns once rather than every month, bringing more is the only way to keep earning, which is exactly the way round we want it. **Is there a referral link or somewhere to see what I have earned?** Both, in the app under Settings → Referrals: your link, a QR code for it, who has arrived through it and what each one is worth. A shop that signs up through the link is matched to you without anybody doing anything. If you would rather tell us a name than share a link, the form still works and a person still reads it. **What if the shop I introduce cancels?** If they cancel, the reward is still yours, it is earned on their first paid month and it is for bringing them, not for keeping them. What does come back is a REFUND: inside the first fourteen days you earn nothing, because the payment did not stand, and after that we take back the same share that was refunded and no more. **When does the credit actually come off a bill?** The earning is automatic, the link matches them, their first payment qualifies it, fourteen days pass and the reward is yours. Moving it onto your account is done by a person here, and then your next invoice takes it automatically. If you are close to a bill and want it on that one, say so and we will make sure it is applied first. **I run a repair shop rather than a supply business. Can I take part?** Yes, on exactly the terms a distributor gets, and it is worth the same to you as to them: a shop that pays for Professional is £59 off your bill whether you are on Starter or Supplier Pro. The only requirement is that you are on a plan yourself, because the credit comes off your own bill. **Does introducing a competitor cost me anything?** Nothing changes about your own shop. The other business gets their own account, their own data and their own subscription, and neither of you can see anything belonging to the other. Most shops introduce the ones they already pass work to, or the ones in the next town rather than the next street. **Can I earn partner credit and still use the extended trial offer?** They are separate things and neither blocks the other. The extended trial is a one-off fourteen days after your first trial ends. Partner credit is earned on shops you introduce and comes off bills you are already paying, so it needs you to have started paying before it has anywhere to go. **Do the shops I introduce have to keep buying from me?** No. The reward follows their subscription, not their orders. If a shop you introduced starts buying from another wholesaler as well, or instead, what you earned is still yours. They are still a customer here and you are still the reason. We would rather not be in the business of policing who you trade with. --- ## Extended trial, for a review and real feedback Source: https://slickcell.com/trial-extension #### Another fourteen days, for telling us the truth about it Fourteen days of SlickCell goes quickly when the counter is busy. If you ran it on real repairs and you are willing to say how that went, in public and to us, ask for fourteen more. ##### Five steps, and four of them are yours Nothing here happens automatically. A person reads every request and a person turns the account back on. - **Run the trial**: Fourteen days on the plan you chose, on real repairs and real stock. - **Ask us**: Fill in the form below once your trial has finished. One shop, one extension. - **Leave the reviews**: One on Google, one on Trustpilot, and say in each that you were given an extended trial for it. - **Tell us how it went**: What broke, what was missing, what you stopped using. This is the part we actually want. - **We turn it back on**: Fourteen more days, with your tickets, stock and invoices exactly where you left them. Asking is not the same as getting: somebody reads every request and decides. We will tell you either way, and we will tell you why. ##### What you are agreeing to, before you ask Eight of them. The two about the reviews are the ones worth reading twice. - **Once per shop**: One extension, of fourteen days. It is not a rolling arrangement and it is not renewed, so treat it as the last fortnight rather than the first of several. - **After the first trial has ended**: Ask when your fourteen days are up, not on day two. The offer exists to give a shop that ran out of runway a second fortnight, and you have nothing to tell us about the product until you have used it. - **It has to be a real shop**: Real repairs, real stock, real customers over the counter. A shop that signed up, looked at the dashboard and left has nothing to review and nothing to tell us, and the extension is not for them. - **Honest, not favourable**: We are asking for the truth, not for a good score. A review that says what went wrong is worth more to us than one that does not, and nothing here depends on the rating you leave. If the product did not suit your shop, write that. - **Say in the review that you were given the extension**: One sentence, in both reviews: you were given an extended trial in return for writing it. It costs you nothing, it is what both review sites and the law expect of a review given for something, and it is the whole difference between an honest review and a bought one. A review without it does not count for this. - **Your data stays where it is**: When a trial runs out the shop goes read only. Nothing is deleted, so every ticket, unit and invoice you entered is still there, and the extension picks up from exactly where you stopped. - **No card, either way**: The same as the first fourteen days. Nothing is taken, so there is nothing to cancel when the extension ends. - **We will not quote you**: Your review stays where you wrote it. We do not reprint it on this website, we do not turn it into a testimonial, and we publish no rating or score of our own anywhere. The feedback you send us privately is read internally and goes no further. The reviews and the feedback are what the extension is given for. We would rather say that plainly than dress it up as a gift. ##### What shops ask before they request one Including the two nobody likes asking out loud. **What if I did not like it?** Then write that, and you still get the fourteen days. The extension is given for an honest review, and an honest bad review is an honest review. A shop that tried it on a real counter and decided against it can tell us more in one paragraph than a month of guessing, so we would rather have it than not. **Can I ask before my trial runs out?** Ask once it has finished. The offer is for a shop that used the full fourteen days and wants a second run at it, so a request on day three is too early to mean anything. Your data is not going anywhere when the trial ends, so there is no rush and nothing to lose by waiting. **Do I have to leave both reviews?** Yes, one on Google and one on Trustpilot, each saying you were given an extended trial for writing it. They are different audiences and a shop looking for software checks both. If leaving one of them is a problem for you, say so on the form and we will talk about it rather than refusing outright. **What happens at the end of the extra fourteen days?** The same as the end of the first fourteen. The shop goes read only until you choose a plan, and everything you entered stays exactly where it is. There is no card on file, so nothing is charged and there is nothing to cancel. **I already left a review. Does that count?** Tell us on the form and we will look. A review you wrote before this offer existed was not given for anything, so it does not carry the disclosure line, and that line is the part that matters. Usually the answer is to add a short update to the review you already have. **Will you use my feedback against me if I come back later?** No. The feedback goes to the people who build the product and nowhere else, and it has no bearing on your price, your plan or anything you are offered afterwards. If you tell us something is broken and we fix it, that is the whole point of asking. --- ## VAT margin scheme calculator (free) Source: https://slickcell.com/tools/vat-margin-calculator #### VAT margin scheme calculator Work out the VAT on a used phone, laptop or games console under the UK margin scheme, and see exactly how the figure was reached. A free calculator from SlickCell, no sign-up, and it works whether or not you ever use our software. ##### When the UK VAT margin scheme applies The arithmetic is simple. Whether you are entitled to use it is the part worth checking. - **It covers second-hand goods**: The scheme can be used for second-hand goods, works of art, antiques and collectors' items. A used phone, laptop or console bought from a member of the public is the ordinary case in this trade. - **Not if you were charged VAT on it**: If you bought the item on a VAT invoice showing a separate VAT amount, it is not eligible for the margin scheme. You reclaim that VAT and sell the item under normal VAT rules instead. - **Repairs and parts stay outside the margin**: You cannot add what you spent on repairs, parts, accessories or business overheads to the purchase price. Where you were charged VAT on those, reclaim it on your VAT return in the normal way. - **The margin already includes the VAT**: That is why the figure is one sixth of the margin, 16.67%, rather than 20% of it. Charging 20% of the margin would overstate what you owe on every sale. - **A loss on one item is not a credit on another**: Under the standard margin scheme you cannot set a loss on one sale against the margin on a different one. The alternative global accounting scheme works differently. - **Records are the condition, not the paperwork**: The scheme requires a stockbook tracking each item individually, plus purchase and sales invoices for all of them. Miss the records and VAT is due on the full selling price, not the margin. - **The invoice must not show VAT separately**: A margin scheme sales invoice shows the total price only. Showing a separate VAT amount on it is not permitted, which catches out anyone whose till prints a standard VAT breakdown by default. General information, not tax advice. Check the guidance that applies where you trade, or speak to your accountant about your circumstances. ##### VAT margin scheme calculator: common questions How the figure is worked out, then what people get wrong. **How do you calculate VAT under the margin scheme?** Take what you paid for the item away from what you sold it for, then divide the difference by six. Bought for £180 and sold for £240, the margin is £60 and the VAT is £60 ÷ 6 = £10.00. If you sold at or below cost, there is no margin and no VAT on that sale. **Can I reclaim VAT on something I sell under the margin scheme?** Not on the item itself: it came to you without VAT shown, which is why it qualifies. You can still reclaim VAT you were charged on parts, repairs and overheads on your VAT return in the normal way; they simply cannot be added to the margin. **Do I pay VAT on the whole selling price of a used phone?** Not if you are using the margin scheme and the item qualifies. VAT is due on the difference between what you paid and what you sold it for, at one sixth of that difference. If the scheme's requirements are not met, VAT becomes due on the full selling price instead. **Why is it 16.67% and not 20%?** Because the margin is a VAT-inclusive amount. One sixth of a VAT-inclusive figure is the same money as 20% of the VAT-exclusive amount underneath it. Applying 20% to the margin would charge you VAT on the VAT, and overstate what you owe on every sale. **Can I add what I spent fixing it to the purchase price?** No. Repairs, parts, accessories and business overheads cannot be included in the margin calculation, so they do not reduce the VAT. Where you were charged VAT on them, you reclaim that on your VAT return in the normal way instead. **What if I sell a device for less than I paid?** There is no margin, so there is nothing to tax on that sale. You cannot then set that loss against the margin you made on a different item, under the standard scheme each sale stands alone. The separate global accounting scheme treats losses differently. **Can I show the VAT on the customer's invoice?** No. A margin scheme sales invoice shows the total price and must not show VAT separately. This trips up shops whose till prints a standard VAT breakdown automatically, because the wrong paperwork can cost the scheme on that sale. **Do I have to register to use the margin scheme?** No separate registration is required. You start using it by keeping the correct records (a stockbook tracking each item individually, with purchase and sales invoices) and reporting it on your VAT return. --- ## Comparisons Source: https://slickcell.com/compare #### SlickCell compared with other repair shop software Side-by-side comparisons for UK phone and device repair shops, with every fact about the other product sourced from its own pages and dated. Eight systems UK repair shops meet in search, in alphabetical order, compared on what each says it is, its published price, how its trial starts and where its data is held. Every fact sourced and dated. £39 a month in pounds with every feature included, against US-dollar per-store pricing with add-ons marked paid on the entry plan; a trial you start yourself against a Request a Demo form; a database hosted in London. £39 a month in pounds with no monthly ticket limit and three users, against a US-dollar Starter plan limited to 75 tickets and invoices a month and one user; a database hosted in London. £39 a month in pounds with VAT stated, against US-dollar pricing from $69 a month excluding sales tax; a database hosted in London, against data stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa, per Orderry's privacy policy. Repair shop software built around the ticket and the device, against a general EPOS till sold for phone stores on a 12-month support package; keep your own card machine, against XEPOS's own terminals. ##### Roundup - **Best repair shop software UK**: Eight systems, and no easy way to line them up. - Price and currency as each vendor publishes it - How each trial starts, and whether it needs a card - Where each says your data is held ##### Head-to-head - **SlickCell vs RepairDesk**: Priced in US dollars per store, with add-ons sold on top of the entry plan. - £39 a month in pounds, every feature included - Trial started online, no demo call - Database hosted in London on every plan - **SlickCell vs RepairShopr**: US-dollar plans, and the entry plan stops at 75 tickets a month. - No monthly ticket or invoice limit - Three users and five staff profiles on Starter - Database hosted in London on every plan - **SlickCell vs Orderry**: Priced in US dollars, with data stored in Iowa per its privacy policy. - £39 a month in pounds, VAT stated - Database hosted in London on every plan - The VAT margin scheme, per unit - **SlickCell vs XEPOS**: A general EPOS till, sold for phone stores on a support contract. - Built around the repair ticket and the device - Every device by IMEI or serial, with its own cost - Keep the card machine you already have ##### What you get whichever system you are leaving - **Every device is its own record**: One phone is one unit with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition, battery health, selling price, supplier and history. Quantity is counted from the units, never typed, so you see the exact profit on the exact phone you sold. - **The VAT margin scheme, per item**: Second-hand stock can be taxed on the margin between what you paid for that unit and what you sold it for, reported separately from standard-rated sales. Because every device carries its own purchase cost, the per-item record the margin scheme asks for is already there. - **Repairs where the money adds up**: A deposit is taken against the job, parts are committed from stock, extra work is quoted before the price changes, a part payment leaves a real balance, and a paid invoice is locked. The ticket, the till, the invoice and the report all agree. - **Trade-ins as a tracked purchase**: Inspect, approve, pay the seller by cash, bank transfer or credit against a sale, and the device enters stock as its own unit with its real acquisition cost. - **Customers kept up to date by text, email and QR**: Text or email a customer from the job on a template. Every receipt and repair label carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. - **Any staff phone is a barcode scanner**: Pair a phone to the till from a QR code on screen and every scan lands in the open sale. No app, no hardware to buy. - **Suppliers connected inside the system**: A purchase order lands directly in a connected supplier's own account; they confirm or re-quote, reserve and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived. - **Hosted in London, sealed per shop**: The database runs in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, with row-level security on every table, two-factor sign-in, database-enforced roles and an append-only audit trail. - **Every feature on every plan**: From £39 a month excluding VAT, in pounds, with a fourteen-day free trial you start yourself: no card and no sales call. No per-transaction fees, and you keep the card machine you already have. --- ## Best repair shop software UK: eight systems compared Source: https://slickcell.com/compare/best-repair-shop-software-uk #### Best repair shop software UK: eight systems compared Price in pounds, how the trial starts, where the data is held and what each system says it is for. Every fact taken from the vendor's own pages, with the source and the date it was checked. SlickCell makes one of the eight, and it is listed in its place alphabetically. Looking for the best repair shop software UK shops can buy in 2026? This page compares eight systems that UK repair shops meet when they search: CellSmart, Orderry, RepairBook, RepairDesk, RepairKeeper, RepairShopr, SlickCell and XEPOS. SlickCell makes one of them, so every fact about the other seven comes from their own website, with the page it came from and the date we checked it. There are no scores or stars. Instead, each system is described by four things a shop can check for itself before it signs up: what the price is and in which currency, how the trial starts, where the data is held and what the vendor says the system is for. If you are choosing repair shop software for a phone, tablet, laptop or console repair shop, start with the table, then read the questions to ask any vendor. #### The eight at a glance Checked on 25 September 2026. Sources under each system and at the foot of the page. | | CellSmart | Orderry | RepairBook | RepairDesk | RepairKeeper | RepairShopr | SlickCell | XEPOS | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | What it says it is | Cell phone store software and repair store POS | All-in-one platform for small business | Repair shop software UK | All-in-one repair shop management software | Repair shop management software for phone, electronics and computer repairs | Computer repair shop software, CRM and invoice system | Repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics | Complete EPOS till systems | | Entry price as published | A Build and Price form | From $69 a month, 3 employees (US dollars, sales tax excluded) | Pre-launch: pricing confirmed at launch | $99 per store a month, or $79 billed annually (US dollars) | From £12 a month | $69.99 a month, or $59.99 billed annually (US dollars, taxes on top) | £39 a month, excluding VAT | Retail software from £20 a month; a £99 retail EPOS system, excluding VAT | | How the trial starts | Request Demo | Free 7-day trial, no credit card | 15-day free trial, no credit card | Free Trial leads to a Request a Demo form | 14-day free trial, card required at signup | Free trial from an online sign-up | 14 days, started online, no card | 14-day software trial with an EPOS system order | | Where the data is held | Not stated in its privacy policy | Privacy policy: stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa, North America | Privacy policy: UK-hosted, does not leave the UK or EEA | Privacy policy: may be transferred to and stored in the United States | Privacy policy: hosting and database with US sub-processors | Privacy policy: processed outside the EEA, the UK and Canada | Database hosted in London, on every plan | Not stated in its privacy policy | ##### CellSmart - CellSmart describes itself as cell phone store software and repair store POS. Its homepage offers Request Demo and Build and Price buttons. Its terms state that it sells and ships hardware only to customers located in the United States. ##### Orderry - Orderry describes itself as an all-in-one platform for small business. Its pricing page lists Startup from $69 a month with three employees included, in US dollars and excluding sales tax, and a free 7-day trial with no credit card required. Its privacy policy says personal information is transferred within and stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa. ##### RepairBook - RepairBook describes itself as repair shop software for the UK. Its pricing page says it is in pre-launch, with pricing to be confirmed at launch, and offers a 15-day free trial with no credit card required. Its privacy policy says personal data is stored on UK-hosted cloud infrastructure and does not leave the UK or the EEA. ##### RepairDesk - RepairDesk describes itself as all-in-one repair shop management software. Its pricing page lists Essential at $99 per store a month, or $79 billed annually, with several features marked as paid extras, and its Free Trial button leads to a Request a Demo form. Its privacy policy says personal information may be transferred to and stored in the United States. ##### RepairKeeper - RepairKeeper describes itself as repair shop management software for phone, electronics and computer repairs. Its pricing page lists plans from £12 a month and a 14-day free trial with a card required at signup. Its privacy policy lists its application hosting and managed database as sub-processors based in the United States. ##### RepairShopr - RepairShopr describes itself as computer repair shop software, CRM and invoice system. Its pricing page lists Starter at $69.99 a month, or $59.99 billed annually, limited to 75 tickets and invoices a month, one location and one user. Its operator's privacy policy states that it transfers and processes data outside the EEA, the UK and Canada. ##### SlickCell - SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics. Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, excluding VAT, with every feature on every plan, and the 14-day trial starts online with no card. Its database is hosted in London; devices are tracked by IMEI or serial, and the VAT margin scheme is worked out per unit. ##### XEPOS - XEPOS describes itself as complete EPOS till systems. Its homepage lists retail software from £20 a month, and its retail pricing page lists a £99 EPOS system for retail, excluding VAT, delivery and a support package. Its trial page offers a 14-day software trial with an EPOS system order. ##### What UK repair shops should compare Six questions to put to any vendor, including us. - **Price in pounds with VAT stated**: A price in dollars moves with the exchange rate, and a price without VAT is not what leaves your account. - **The VAT margin scheme on used devices**: If you sell second-hand devices, ask whether the margin is worked out per unit from its own purchase cost. - **Devices tracked by IMEI or serial**: A phone is tracked by IMEI or serial; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial. Check that the system holds both without forcing one into the other. - **How the trial starts**: Can you start it yourself tonight, and does it need a card? - **Where the data is held**: Read the privacy policy, not the homepage. - **Getting your data out**: Ask what exports to CSV, from which screens. ##### What software do phone repair shops use? - Most counter repair shops run repair shop software that holds the repair ticket, the till and the stock together, tracked by IMEI or serial. Some run a general EPOS till and keep repairs in a separate job book or spreadsheet. The eight above are the systems UK shops meet first in search. ##### Where SlickCell fits - **Every device is its own record**: One phone is one unit with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition, battery health, selling price, supplier and history. Quantity is counted from the units, never typed, so you see the exact profit on the exact phone you sold. - **The VAT margin scheme, per item**: Second-hand stock can be taxed on the margin between what you paid for that unit and what you sold it for, reported separately from standard-rated sales. Because every device carries its own purchase cost, the per-item record the margin scheme asks for is already there. - **Hosted in London, sealed per shop**: The database runs in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, with row-level security on every table, two-factor sign-in, database-enforced roles and an append-only audit trail. - **Every feature on every plan**: From £39 a month excluding VAT, in pounds, with a fourteen-day free trial you start yourself: no card and no sales call. No per-transaction fees, and you keep the card machine you already have. - Every statement on this page about another company, with where it came from and when it was checked. Prices and terms change: if anything here is out of date, write to us and we will correct it. ##### CellSmart's homepage title is "Cell Phone Store Software | Repair Store POS | POS for Every Industry", and its homepage buttons are Request Demo and Build and Price. - Source: https://cellsmartpos.com/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### CellSmart's terms state that it sells and ships hardware only to customers located in the United States. Its privacy policy, a section of those terms, does not state where data is held. - Source: https://www.cellsmartpos.com/legal/terms-of-service - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's homepage title describes it as an "All-in-One Platform for Small Business". - Source: https://orderry.com/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's pricing page lists Startup from $69 a month with three employees included, Business from $99 and Enterprise from $199, in US dollars and excluding sales tax, and a free 7-day trial with no credit card required. - Source: https://orderry.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### On Orderry's Startup plan, extra employees are listed at $6 a month and an extra location at $49 a month, up to 15 employees. - Source: https://orderry.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's privacy policy states that personally identifying information is collected, used, disclosed, transferred within Council Bluffs, Iowa, North America and stored by Orderry. - Source: https://orderry.com/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's privacy policy names Orderry as a limited liability partnership registered in the United Kingdom, number OC426588, at 7 Bell Yard, London. - Source: https://orderry.com/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry publishes a comparison page headed "RepairDesk vs. Orderry: Which Is Best for Electronics Repair Shops?". - Source: https://orderry.com/repairdesk-vs-orderry-20348/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairBook's homepage title describes it as "Repair Shop Software UK" with a free 15-day trial. - Source: https://repairbook.co.uk/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairBook's pricing page says it is in pre-launch, with pricing to be confirmed at launch and a first-year discount for the first 100 shops that join its waitlist, and a 15-day free trial with no credit card required. - Source: https://repairbook.co.uk/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairBook's privacy policy (last updated 11 April 2026) states that personal data is stored on UK-hosted cloud infrastructure and does not leave the United Kingdom or the European Economic Area. - Source: https://repairbook.co.uk/privacy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's pricing page lists Essential at $99 per store per month, or $79 per store per month billed annually, and Growth at $149, or $119 billed annually. Advanced is quoted on request. Prices are shown in US dollars, and payment is upfront. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### On the Essential plan, RepairDesk's pricing page marks Loyalty, Store Credits, Gift Cards, Email Campaigns and Appointments Pro as paid. RepairDesk Connect is a paid add-on on Essential and Growth, and the Phone System is a paid add-on on every plan. The page also states that not all integrations are available with each plan. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ · https://www.repairdesk.co/repairdesk-connect/ · https://www.repairdesk.co/repairdesk-phone-system/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's Free Trial button leads to a page titled Request a Demo, and its pricing FAQ says a RepairDesk product specialist will contact you to demo the product. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ → book.repairdesk.co - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's privacy policy states that personal information may be transferred to, stored and processed in the United States. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/privacy-policy/ (last updated 10 July 2026) - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's site menu describes its Inventory Management feature as "Serialize your inventory and get low stock alerts". - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ (Features menu) → https://www.repairdesk.co/features/inventory-management-software/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's pricing page lists its own RepairDesk Payments, and integrations with Square Terminal, Payment Sense, PayFacto, Stripe and PayPal. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's homepage heading describes it as "All-in-One Repair Shop Management Software". - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairKeeper's homepage title describes it as "Repair Shop Management Software for Phone, Electronics & Computer Repairs". - Source: https://repairkeeper.co.uk/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairKeeper's pricing page lists plans from £12 a month and a 14-day free trial with a card required at signup. - Source: https://repairkeeper.co.uk/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairKeeper's privacy policy lists Vercel Inc. (United States) for application hosting and Neon Inc. (United States) for its managed PostgreSQL database, and says several of its sub-processors are based outside the UK, primarily in the United States. - Source: https://repairkeeper.co.uk/privacy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's pricing page lists Starter at $69.99 a month, or $59.99 billed annually, Repair Shop at $139.99, or $129.99, and Big Chain at $149.99, or $139.99, in US dollars. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's Starter plan is limited to 75 tickets and invoices a month, one location and one user account. Unlimited tickets start on Repair Shop, and more than one location on Big Chain. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's licence agreement states that fees are exclusive of sales, use and value added taxes. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/repairshopr-user-access-and-license-agreement - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr is operated by Syncro Technologies, Inc., whose privacy policy states that it transfers and processes data outside the EEA, the UK and Canada. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's features page lists "Scan serial numbers to invoices for warranty tracking" among its invoicing features. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/features - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's homepage title describes it as computer repair shop software, a CRM and an invoice system, and its heading invites visitors to sign up for a free trial. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's homepage title is "Complete EPOS Till Systems", and it lists retail software from £20 a month. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's retail pricing page lists a £99 EPOS system for retail, with the price excluding VAT, delivery charges and a support package. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/retail/pricing/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's mobile phone store page lists an EPOS system for mobile phone stores from £99, which it says can be bought for £99 with a 12-month support package at £30 + VAT a month, after which the system is yours. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/retail/business-types/mobile-phone-stores/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's mobile repair shop page is titled "Mobile Repair Shop Software | Phone Repair EPOS System" and lists device information tracking (device details, faults, repair notes and service information) among its features, with Contact Sales as its call to action. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/mobile-repair-shop-software/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's trial page offers a 14-day software trial with an EPOS system order, with a full software refund if it is returned within 14 days. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/try-xepos-risk-free - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's payment page offers its own card terminals and card payment processing under the name XE PAY. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/payment/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's privacy policy names the company as XE POS Ltd, company number 09229843, registered at The Exchange, 26 Haslucks Green Road, Shirley, Solihull, B90 2EL, and does not state where data is held. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Choosing repair shop software: what shops ask **What is the best repair shop software in the UK?** The one that fits what you repair and sell. Compare the price in pounds with VAT stated, whether used devices are taxed per unit under the margin scheme, whether devices are tracked by IMEI or serial, how the trial starts and where the data is held. The table above sets those out for eight systems, each fact sourced. **What software do phone repair shops use?** Most run repair shop software that keeps the repair ticket, the till and the stock together, with devices tracked by IMEI or serial. Some use a general EPOS till and keep repairs in a job book or spreadsheet. The eight systems compared here are the ones UK shops meet first. **What is SlickCell?** SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: phones, tablets, laptops, games consoles and smartwatches. It runs repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins, supplier ordering, staff rotas and reports in one web app, hosted in London. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create the account, choose a plan and use every feature for 14 days without entering card details. You add a card only if you decide to stay. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. --- ## SlickCell vs RepairDesk Source: https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-repairdesk #### The RepairDesk alternative for UK repair shops SlickCell compared with RepairDesk: priced in pounds with every feature on every plan, data hosted in London, every device tracked by IMEI or serial, and a 14-day trial with no card that you start yourself tonight. Every RepairDesk fact below is sourced and dated. #### The differences a UK shop feels first RepairDesk facts are taken from their own pages on 25 September 2026, with sources below. | | SlickCell | RepairDesk | |---|---|---| | Entry price | £39 a month, excluding VAT | $99 per store a month, or $79 billed annually (US dollars) | | Currency and VAT | Pounds, VAT stated on every price | US dollars | | Add-ons sold on top of the entry plan | None: every feature on every plan | Loyalty, store credits, gift cards, email campaigns, appointments, Connect and the phone system listed as paid | | Starting a trial | Sign up online: 14 days, no card, no sales call | Free Trial leads to a Request a Demo form | | Where your data is held | Database hosted in London, on every plan | Privacy policy: may be transferred to and stored in the United States | | Devices by IMEI or serial | Each device its own unit, with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and margin | Inventory feature described as "Serialize your inventory" | | Card payments | Keep your own card machine; no cut of your takings | RepairDesk Payments, or Square, Payment Sense, Stripe and PayPal integrations | ##### Why UK repair shops choose SlickCell - **One price in pounds, and nothing sold on top**: SlickCell is £39, £59 or £99 a month excluding VAT, and every plan carries every feature: plans differ only by team size, locations, discount rules and support. RepairDesk's pricing page quotes US dollars per store and marks loyalty, store credits, gift cards, email campaigns and appointments as paid on its entry plan. - **Start tonight, not after a demo**: Sign up, pick a plan and fourteen days start straight away, with no card and no call. RepairDesk's Free Trial button leads to a Request a Demo form and a call from a product specialist. - **Your shop's database is in London**: SlickCell's database is hosted in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, and sealed per shop by row-level security. RepairDesk's privacy policy says personal information may be transferred to, stored and processed in the United States. - **Every device is its own unit, with its own cost**: Buy three identical phones for £280, £320 and £350 and SlickCell holds three units, each with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and price. Laptops, tablets, consoles and smartwatches are tracked the same way by serial number. You see the real profit on the exact device you sold, and the margin scheme is worked out from that unit's own purchase cost. - **Keep the card machine with the best rate**: Take card payments on the terminal you already have and the till records them on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your takings and does not ask you to move processor. - **Staff rotas and payroll inputs in the same system**: Shifts, attendance and leave are recorded against each employee, hours are priced against the rate in force on the day, commission is added, and a payslip and a real labour cost come out. Hand the figures to whoever runs your payroll. - **Order from your suppliers inside SlickCell**: When your supplier is connected, your purchase order lands in their own account, they confirm or re-quote and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived without retyping it. - Every statement this page makes about RepairDesk, with where it came from and when it was checked. Prices and terms change: if anything here has gone out of date, write to us and we will correct it. ##### RepairDesk's pricing page lists Essential at $99 per store per month, or $79 per store per month billed annually, and Growth at $149, or $119 billed annually. Advanced is quoted on request. Prices are shown in US dollars, and payment is upfront. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### On the Essential plan, RepairDesk's pricing page marks Loyalty, Store Credits, Gift Cards, Email Campaigns and Appointments Pro as paid. RepairDesk Connect is a paid add-on on Essential and Growth, and the Phone System is a paid add-on on every plan. The page also states that not all integrations are available with each plan. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ · https://www.repairdesk.co/repairdesk-connect/ · https://www.repairdesk.co/repairdesk-phone-system/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's Free Trial button leads to a page titled Request a Demo, and its pricing FAQ says a RepairDesk product specialist will contact you to demo the product. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ → book.repairdesk.co - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's privacy policy states that personal information may be transferred to, stored and processed in the United States. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/privacy-policy/ (last updated 10 July 2026) - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's site menu describes its Inventory Management feature as "Serialize your inventory and get low stock alerts". - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ (Features menu) → https://www.repairdesk.co/features/inventory-management-software/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's pricing page lists its own RepairDesk Payments, and integrations with Square Terminal, Payment Sense, PayFacto, Stripe and PayPal. - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/pricing/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairDesk's homepage heading describes it as "All-in-One Repair Shop Management Software". - Source: https://www.repairdesk.co/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### What shops ask before switching from RepairDesk **What is the best RepairDesk alternative for a UK repair shop?** SlickCell. It is priced in pounds from £39 a month with every feature on every plan, handles UK VAT including the margin scheme, tracks every device by IMEI or serial as its own unit with its own cost, keeps its data in London, and you can start the fourteen-day trial yourself with no card and no sales call. **How much does RepairDesk cost compared with SlickCell?** RepairDesk's pricing page lists Essential at $99 per store a month, or $79 billed annually, and Growth at $149, or $119 billed annually, in US dollars, with several features marked as paid extras (checked 25 September 2026). SlickCell is £39, £59 or £99 a month excluding VAT, with every feature on every plan. **Where is my data held?** With SlickCell, in London: the database is hosted in London on every plan. RepairDesk's privacy policy states that personal information may be transferred to, stored and processed in the United States. **Can I move from RepairDesk to SlickCell?** Yes. Export your parts, accessories and devices to a spreadsheet and import them from CSV, with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Finish open repairs on RepairDesk and start new work in SlickCell from your go-live day. We will do the move for you if you ask. **Does SlickCell handle the VAT margin scheme?** Yes, per unit. Margin is one of the tax rule types and can be scoped to used stock, and because every device carries its own purchase cost, the margin on each sale is worked out from that unit and reported separately from standard-rated sales. **Do I have to speak to sales before I can try it?** No. Sign up online, choose a plan and the fourteen-day trial starts straight away with every feature switched on. There is no card to enter and nobody has to call you first. **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. **Can I order parts from my supplier inside SlickCell?** Yes, when your supplier is connected. Your purchase order lands in the supplier's own account, they confirm or re-quote and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived without retyping it. --- ## SlickCell vs RepairShopr Source: https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-repairshopr #### The RepairShopr alternative for UK repair shops SlickCell compared with RepairShopr: priced in pounds with no monthly ticket limit, a team from day one, data hosted in London and every device tracked by IMEI or serial. Every RepairShopr fact below is sourced and dated. #### The differences a UK shop feels first RepairShopr facts are taken from their own pages on 25 September 2026, with sources below. | | SlickCell | RepairShopr | |---|---|---| | Entry price | £39 a month, excluding VAT | $69.99 a month, or $59.99 billed annually (US dollars) | | Currency and VAT | Pounds, VAT stated on every price | US dollars, taxes added on top | | Tickets and invoices on the entry plan | No monthly limit | 75 a month | | People on the entry plan | 3 app users and 5 employee profiles | 1 user account | | Where your data is held | Database hosted in London, on every plan | Processed outside the EEA, the UK and Canada | | Devices by IMEI or serial | Each device its own unit, with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and margin | Serial numbers scanned to invoices, for warranty tracking | ##### Why UK repair shops choose SlickCell - **No ticket limit on any plan**: Book in as many repairs and raise as many invoices as the shop can handle, on every plan. RepairShopr's Starter plan stops at 75 tickets and invoices a month and one user account. - **A team from the first day**: Starter carries three people who sign in and five employee profiles for hours, commission and job assignment, all with database-enforced roles, at £39 a month excluding VAT. Shifts, attendance and leave are recorded against each employee and priced into a payslip and a real labour cost. - **Your shop's database is in London**: SlickCell is hosted in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, and sealed per shop by row-level security. RepairShopr's operator states that it transfers and processes data outside the EEA, the UK and Canada. - **Every device is its own unit, with its own cost**: Each phone, laptop, tablet, console or smartwatch carries its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and price, so the profit on the exact device you sold is real and the margin scheme is worked out from that unit's own purchase cost. - **Start tonight, with no card**: Sign up, pick a plan and fourteen days start straight away with every feature on. There is no card to enter, and when the trial ends you choose a plan or stop, with nothing to cancel. - **Order from your suppliers inside SlickCell**: When your supplier is connected, your purchase order lands in their own account, they confirm or re-quote and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived without retyping it. - Every statement this page makes about RepairShopr, with where it came from and when it was checked. Prices and terms change: if anything here has gone out of date, write to us and we will correct it. ##### RepairShopr's pricing page lists Starter at $69.99 a month, or $59.99 billed annually, Repair Shop at $139.99, or $129.99, and Big Chain at $149.99, or $139.99, in US dollars. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's Starter plan is limited to 75 tickets and invoices a month, one location and one user account. Unlimited tickets start on Repair Shop, and more than one location on Big Chain. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's licence agreement states that fees are exclusive of sales, use and value added taxes. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/repairshopr-user-access-and-license-agreement - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr is operated by Syncro Technologies, Inc., whose privacy policy states that it transfers and processes data outside the EEA, the UK and Canada. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's features page lists "Scan serial numbers to invoices for warranty tracking" among its invoicing features. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/features - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### RepairShopr's homepage title describes it as computer repair shop software, a CRM and an invoice system, and its heading invites visitors to sign up for a free trial. - Source: https://www.repairshopr.com/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### What shops ask before switching from RepairShopr **What is the best RepairShopr alternative for a UK repair shop?** SlickCell. It is priced in pounds from £39 a month with no monthly ticket limit and every feature on every plan, handles UK VAT including the margin scheme, tracks every device by IMEI or serial as its own unit with its own cost, and keeps its data in London. **How much does RepairShopr cost compared with SlickCell?** RepairShopr's pricing page lists Starter at $69.99 a month, or $59.99 billed annually, with 75 tickets and invoices a month and one user, and Repair Shop at $139.99, in US dollars with taxes added (checked 25 September 2026). SlickCell is £39, £59 or £99 a month excluding VAT, with every feature on every plan. **Can I move from RepairShopr to SlickCell?** Yes. Export your parts, accessories and devices to a spreadsheet and import them from CSV, with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Finish open repairs on RepairShopr and start new work in SlickCell from your go-live day. We will do the move for you if you ask. **Where is my data held?** With SlickCell, in London: the database is hosted in London on every plan. RepairShopr's operator, Syncro Technologies, states that it transfers and processes data outside the EEA, the UK and Canada. **Is there free software like RepairShopr?** Free for the first 14 days, with every feature and no card. After that, Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. When the trial ends you choose how to pay, or you stop. There is nothing to cancel. **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. **Can I see it before I sign up?** Yes. Book a demo and we walk through your own workflow on the real screens, or start the trial and put a real repair through it. --- ## SlickCell vs Orderry Source: https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-orderry #### Orderry alternative for UK repair shops: SlickCell compared Price in pounds, where the data is held, how the trial starts and how used devices are taxed, with every Orderry fact taken from its own pages and dated. Looking for an Orderry alternative for a UK repair shop? SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins, supplier ordering, staff rotas and reports in one web app, hosted in London. Orderry describes itself as an all-in-one platform for small business, priced in US dollars from $69 a month, and its privacy policy says personal information is stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa. Orderry pricing, as published on its own site on 25 September 2026, is in the table below. #### Orderry pricing and SlickCell pricing Orderry facts are taken from its own pages on 25 September 2026, with sources below. | | SlickCell | Orderry | |---|---|---| | Entry price | £39 a month, excluding VAT | Startup from $69 a month, three employees included | | Currency and VAT | Pounds, VAT stated on every price | US dollars, sales tax excluded | | Adding people and places | Plans by team size and locations; each extra branch priced per month | Extra employees $6 a month and an extra location $49 a month on Startup | | Starting a trial | Sign up online: 14 days, no card | Free 7-day trial, no credit card | | Where your data is held | Database hosted in London, on every plan | Privacy policy: stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa, North America | ##### Why UK repair shops choose SlickCell - **Priced in pounds, with VAT stated**: Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, excluding VAT, with every feature on every plan. Orderry's pricing page quotes US dollars, excluding sales tax. - **Your shop's database is in London**: SlickCell's database is hosted in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, and sealed per shop by row-level security. Orderry's privacy policy says personal information is stored in Council Bluffs, Iowa. - **The VAT margin scheme, per unit**: Every used device is its own unit with its own IMEI or serial and purchase cost, so a margin-scheme sale is taxed on that unit's own margin and reported apart from standard-rated sales. - **Fourteen days to try it, with no card**: Sign up, pick a plan and the trial starts straight away with every feature on. There is no card to enter, and when it ends you choose a plan or stop. - Every statement this page makes about Orderry, with where it came from and when it was checked. Prices and terms change: if anything here has gone out of date, write to us and we will correct it. ##### Orderry's homepage title describes it as an "All-in-One Platform for Small Business". - Source: https://orderry.com/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's pricing page lists Startup from $69 a month with three employees included, Business from $99 and Enterprise from $199, in US dollars and excluding sales tax, and a free 7-day trial with no credit card required. - Source: https://orderry.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### On Orderry's Startup plan, extra employees are listed at $6 a month and an extra location at $49 a month, up to 15 employees. - Source: https://orderry.com/pricing - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's privacy policy states that personally identifying information is collected, used, disclosed, transferred within Council Bluffs, Iowa, North America and stored by Orderry. - Source: https://orderry.com/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry's privacy policy names Orderry as a limited liability partnership registered in the United Kingdom, number OC426588, at 7 Bell Yard, London. - Source: https://orderry.com/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### Orderry publishes a comparison page headed "RepairDesk vs. Orderry: Which Is Best for Electronics Repair Shops?". - Source: https://orderry.com/repairdesk-vs-orderry-20348/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### What shops ask before switching from Orderry **What is the best Orderry alternative for a UK repair shop?** SlickCell. It is priced in pounds from £39 a month with every feature on every plan, handles UK VAT including the margin scheme per unit, tracks every device by IMEI or serial, keeps its data in London, and you can start the 14-day trial yourself with no card. **How much does Orderry cost compared with SlickCell?** Orderry's pricing page lists Startup from $69 a month, Business from $99 and Enterprise from $199, in US dollars excluding sales tax (checked 25 September 2026). SlickCell: Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, excluding VAT, with every feature on every plan. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create the account, choose a plan and use every feature for 14 days without entering card details. You add a card only if you decide to stay. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **Where is SlickCell data hosted, and is it secure?** In London, on every plan. The database is encrypted in transit and at rest, every shop is sealed off by row-level security on every table, staff roles are enforced by the database, two-factor sign-in is available on every account, and changes are written to an append-only audit trail. --- ## SlickCell vs XEPOS Source: https://slickcell.com/compare/slickcell-vs-xepos #### XEPOS alternative for repair and phone shops: SlickCell compared A general EPOS till against repair shop software built around the ticket, the device and the margin scheme. Every XEPOS fact is taken from its own site, with the source and the date. Looking for an XEPOS alternative for a repair or phone shop? XEPOS describes itself as complete EPOS till systems, and sells an EPOS system for mobile phone stores on a support contract. SlickCell is repair shop software and POS for shops that repair and sell electronics: repair tickets, the till, invoices, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins, supplier ordering, staff rotas and reports in one web app, hosted in London, from £39 a month excluding VAT. The difference a repair shop feels first is where the system starts: a till that knows about repairs and devices, with the VAT margin scheme worked out per unit, against a general EPOS with a mobile phone store configuration. #### The differences a repair or phone shop feels first XEPOS facts are taken from its own pages on 25 September 2026, with sources below. | | SlickCell | XEPOS | |---|---|---| | Entry price | £39 a month, excluding VAT, every feature included | Phone store system £99 with a 12-month support package at £30 + VAT a month; retail software from £20 a month | | Currency and VAT | Pounds, VAT stated on every price | Pounds, prices shown excluding VAT | | Starting a trial | Sign up online: 14 days, no card, no hardware to buy | A 14-day software trial with an EPOS system order | | Card payments | Keep your own card machine; no cut of your takings | Its own XE PAY card terminals and processing | | Devices | Each device its own unit, with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and margin | Device details, faults, repair notes and service information recorded (its repair page) | | Where your data is held | Database hosted in London, on every plan | Not stated in its privacy policy | ##### Why repair and phone shops choose SlickCell - **Built around the repair ticket, not added to a till**: The job, the deposit, the part reserved from stock, the approval and the balance sit on one ticket, and the invoice is produced from it. XEPOS describes itself as complete EPOS till systems, with a mobile repair configuration on a separate page. - **Every device is its own unit, with its own cost**: Buy three identical phones for £280, £320 and £350 and SlickCell holds three units, each with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and price. Laptops, tablets, consoles and smartwatches are tracked the same way by serial number. - **The VAT margin scheme, per unit**: Margin is a tax rule you scope to used stock, so a margin-scheme sale is taxed on that unit's own purchase cost and reported apart from standard-rated sales. - **Keep the card machine with the best rate**: Take card payments on the terminal you already have and the till records them on the sale, split with cash if needed. XEPOS offers its own card terminals and processing (XE PAY); SlickCell takes no cut of your takings and does not ask you to move processor. - Every statement this page makes about XEPOS, with where it came from and when it was checked. Prices and terms change: if anything here has gone out of date, write to us and we will correct it. ##### XEPOS's homepage title is "Complete EPOS Till Systems", and it lists retail software from £20 a month. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's retail pricing page lists a £99 EPOS system for retail, with the price excluding VAT, delivery charges and a support package. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/retail/pricing/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's mobile phone store page lists an EPOS system for mobile phone stores from £99, which it says can be bought for £99 with a 12-month support package at £30 + VAT a month, after which the system is yours. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/retail/business-types/mobile-phone-stores/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's mobile repair shop page is titled "Mobile Repair Shop Software | Phone Repair EPOS System" and lists device information tracking (device details, faults, repair notes and service information) among its features, with Contact Sales as its call to action. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/mobile-repair-shop-software/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's trial page offers a 14-day software trial with an EPOS system order, with a full software refund if it is returned within 14 days. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/try-xepos-risk-free - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's payment page offers its own card terminals and card payment processing under the name XE PAY. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/payment/ - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### XEPOS's privacy policy names the company as XE POS Ltd, company number 09229843, registered at The Exchange, 26 Haslucks Green Road, Shirley, Solihull, B90 2EL, and does not state where data is held. - Source: https://xepos.co.uk/privacy-policy - Checked: 2026-09-25 ##### What shops ask before choosing between SlickCell and XEPOS **What is the best XEPOS alternative for a repair shop?** SlickCell, if repairs are part of the business. Repair tickets, the till and stock by IMEI or serial are one system, the VAT margin scheme is worked out per unit, you keep your own card machine, the data is hosted in London, and it costs from £39 a month with a 14-day trial that needs no card. **Is XEPOS a UK company?** Its privacy policy names the company as XE POS Ltd, company number 09229843, with a registered address in Shirley, Solihull (checked 25 September 2026). **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create the account, choose a plan and use every feature for 14 days without entering card details. You add a card only if you decide to stay. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **Where is SlickCell data hosted, and is it secure?** In London, on every plan. The database is encrypted in transit and at rest, every shop is sealed off by row-level security on every table, staff roles are enforced by the database, two-factor sign-in is available on every account, and changes are written to an append-only audit trail. --- ## Industries Source: https://slickcell.com/for #### Software for every electronics repair and retail shop SlickCell runs phones, tablets, laptops, desktops, games consoles, smartwatches and earbuds on one system: repaired, sold and traded in, with every device tracked by IMEI or serial. Pick the page written for your shop. ##### Repair shops - **For phone repair shops**: SlickCell is built around the way a repair shop actually runs: a counter with a queue, a bench with parts on it, and a drawer of phones that all cost something different. - Repairs - A repair-aware till - Device-unit stock - **For computer repair shops**: A bench job that takes three days is a different shape from a screen swap that takes an hour. Quotes before work, parts on order, machines by serial: the SlickCell ticket is built for it. - Laptops by serial - Awaiting parts - Deposits and balances - **For desktop repair shops**: A tower, an iMac and a mini PC are three different jobs. SlickCell books each against a desktop-only model list, and keeps the desktops you stock in a category of their own, with processor, memory, graphics and form factor on the record. - Towers and workstations - All-in-ones and iMacs - Mini PCs - **For tablet repair shops**: SlickCell is tablet repair shop software that takes a serial number or an IMEI at booking, whichever the tablet shows, and sells each refurbished tablet as its own unit, with its generation and connectivity on the record. - Wi-Fi or cellular - Surface and Fire included - Margin scheme per unit - **For games console repair shops**: SlickCell is game console repair software that books every console in by its serial number, sells refurbished consoles as their own units and takes trade-ins on the same system. - Consoles by serial - Handhelds too - Trade-ins - **For smartwatch repair shops**: Screens, batteries and straps on one ticket, every watch you stock recorded by case size, material and connectivity, and refurbished watches sold as their own units. - Case size and connectivity - Rings and bands too - Trade-ins - **For earbud and headphone repair shops**: Earbuds and headphones have a serial number, not an IMEI. SlickCell books each pair in by serial, keeps noise cancelling and how it charges on the stock record, and sells refurbished pairs as their own units. - Every variant in the list - Noise cancelling and charging - Trade-ins - **For electronics repair shops**: SlickCell is electronics repair shop software for the morning a phone, a laptop, a games console and a smartwatch all come in: each booked in by its type and its IMEI or serial number, and each run through the same ticket, invoices and cash drawer. - Phones and tablets - Laptops and desktops - Games consoles ##### Shops that sell - **For phone shops**: A shop that sells phones, cases and chargers all day, and takes the odd repair, needs a till first. This one counts accessories by the box and tracks every phone on its own. - The till - Trade-ins - Discounts as rules - **For electronics shops**: SlickCell is an electronics store POS for laptops, tablets, phones and consoles sold as individual units by serial number or IMEI, and cables, cases and chargers counted by the box. One till and one drawer for both. - Devices by unit - Accessories by quantity - Controlled returns ##### Suppliers - **For suppliers**: Software for parts distributors and wholesalers. SlickCell is mobile phone wholesaler software for businesses that supply repair shops and electronics retailers. The shops you supply raise the order in their own SlickCell account, and it arrives in yours as an order: not an email to re-key, not a PDF someone reconciles later. - Incoming orders - A shared catalogue - Control what is seen ##### What every shop gets - **Every device is its own record**: One phone is one unit with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition, battery health, selling price, supplier and history. Quantity is counted from the units, never typed, so you see the exact profit on the exact phone you sold. - **The VAT margin scheme, per item**: Second-hand stock can be taxed on the margin between what you paid for that unit and what you sold it for, reported separately from standard-rated sales. Because every device carries its own purchase cost, the per-item record the margin scheme asks for is already there. - **Repairs where the money adds up**: A deposit is taken against the job, parts are committed from stock, extra work is quoted before the price changes, a part payment leaves a real balance, and a paid invoice is locked. The ticket, the till, the invoice and the report all agree. - **Trade-ins as a tracked purchase**: Inspect, approve, pay the seller by cash, bank transfer or credit against a sale, and the device enters stock as its own unit with its real acquisition cost. - **Customers kept up to date by text, email and QR**: Text or email a customer from the job on a template. Every receipt and repair label carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. - **Any staff phone is a barcode scanner**: Pair a phone to the till from a QR code on screen and every scan lands in the open sale. No app, no hardware to buy. - **Suppliers connected inside the system**: A purchase order lands directly in a connected supplier's own account; they confirm or re-quote, reserve and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived. - **Hosted in London, sealed per shop**: The database runs in London on every plan, encrypted in transit and at rest, with row-level security on every table, two-factor sign-in, database-enforced roles and an append-only audit trail. - **Every feature on every plan**: From £39 a month excluding VAT, in pounds, with a fourteen-day free trial you start yourself: no card and no sales call. No per-transaction fees, and you keep the card machine you already have. --- ## For phone repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/phone-repair-shops #### Mobile phone repair shop software SlickCell is built around the way a repair shop actually runs: a counter with a queue, a bench with parts on it, and a drawer of phones that all cost something different. #### One morning, start to finish - SlickCell is mobile phone repair shop software: repair tickets, a till that understands repairs, stock tracked by IMEI or serial number, trade-ins and the UK VAT margin scheme in one web app. A screen repair is booked in on one ticket, the part is reserved from stock, a deposit is taken against the job, and the balance settles at the same till that sells cases and refurbished phones. Customers check the repair status from a QR code on their receipt. In the US the same thing is searched for as cell phone repair shop software. It runs in any browser on a computer, tablet or phone, it is hosted in London, and it costs from £39 a month excluding VAT. - Ten past nine. A cracked screen comes in, and the customer leaves a deposit against the job rather than a promise. The part is checked, it is on the shelf, and it is reserved to that ticket, so the same screen cannot be sold out from under the repair at the counter an hour later. - By eleven the technician finds the battery is going too. That is quoted, sent to the customer, and approved before anyone touches it, so the extra cost is agreed rather than discovered at collection. At half twelve the phone is handed back, the balance settles against the deposit already taken, and the receipt shows what was paid and how. - The handset the customer traded in is costed, graded and listed by lunchtime, as its own unit, with its own price. ##### Repair ticket management, from booking to handover Each step wrote to the next. Nothing in that morning was retyped, and nothing was held together by someone remembering it. - **Booked in**: Device, fault and customer on one ticket. - **Deposit**: Money against the job, not a note on a pad. - **Part reserved**: Committed to that ticket so it cannot be sold twice. - **Extra work quoted**: Quoted on the ticket before the cost lands. - **Balance settled**: The deposit counts; what is left is a real figure. - **Trade-in listed**: Costed and graded as its own unit, ready to sell. A part used reduces stock, the stock movement lands in cost of goods, and cost of goods lands in the month's profit: which is why the trade-in you took at half twelve is already costed when you look at the figures on Friday. ##### Repair tracking and payments you can inspect Not a quote from a shop you cannot ring. Three artefacts, in real markup, whose figures check against each other. ##### A split-payment receipt One sale settled across card and cash. The tenders add up to the total, the change is what went back over the counter, and the balance lands on zero: the case where money usually goes missing. ##### A device unit's history One handset by IMEI or serial: what it cost, what it sold for, its condition, and the stock ledger that recorded it arriving and leaving. Quantity is derived from units, never typed. ##### A report total, and its source The revenue figure and the invoices it is made of, on the same screen: the rows add up to the total exactly. The report is not a separate number; it is the same number, traced. ##### Fewer disputes, stock that matches, VAT that reconciles The three things a shop owner actually notices after the first month. - **Fewer disputes**: What was quoted, approved and paid is on the ticket, so collection stops being an argument. - **Stock that matches**: Quantity is derived from real units, so the shelf and the system stop drifting apart. - **VAT that reconciles**: Standard and margin-scheme VAT are reported separately, from the same records as the invoices. - **Deposits that count**: Money taken at intake is money against the bill rather than something to remember. - **A month you can close**: Figures open onto the records behind them, so month-end is checking rather than rebuilding. ##### Mobile phone repair software: what you get ##### Repairs One ticket per job, from booked in to handed over, with warranty from handover. ##### A repair-aware till Repairs, accessories and handsets on one sale, with split tender. ##### Device-unit stock Each handset its own record; parts counted by quantity. ##### Invoices & payments Part payments, corrections and refunds as one financial history. ##### Used devices Cost, margin and margin-scheme VAT held per unit. ##### Trade-ins Take a handset in, cost it, and put it on the shelf as stock. ##### Reports & tax Figures that open onto the records that produced them. An AI summary of your reports in plain English. ##### More than one branch One login across shops, with stock and staff kept per branch. ##### Mobile scanning Pair a staff phone off a QR and scan into the open sale. ##### Customer updates Email from the job, and a QR code on every receipt that opens a live repair status page. ##### Cash drawer Open on a float, close on a count, see the difference. ##### Stocktake Count against a snapshot; stock moves only once approved. ##### What shop owners ask before switching The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. **We are a two-person shop. Is this too much system?** The plans start at a single location with three app users, which is the size most shops begin at. The parts you do not need stay out of the way. You are not paying for a multi-branch rollout to book in a screen repair. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **What happens to the way we already track repairs?** It becomes one record instead of a board, a notebook and a phone thread. The job and the money live on the same ticket, so a deposit taken at intake is money against the bill rather than something someone has to remember at collection. **Do we have to track every handset individually?** Devices, yes: each carries an IMEI, serial number or shop reference stored as free text. Parts and accessories are counted by quantity, which is the right shape for a box of screen protectors. You are not logging cables one at a time. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **What if a customer pays only part of the bill?** The shortfall stays visible as a balance against the job. It is never converted into a discount, so you can see what is owed, chase it, and settle it later against the same record rather than opening a new one. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. --- ## For computer repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/computer-repair-shops #### Computer repair shop software for laptops and PCs A bench job that takes three days is a different shape from a screen swap that takes an hour. Quotes before work, parts on order, machines by serial: the SlickCell ticket is built for it. #### One laptop, Monday to Thursday - SlickCell is computer repair shop software for laptop, desktop and all-in-one repairs, and for the consoles and tablets that come in beside them. Each machine is booked in by make, model and serial number, with its processor, memory, storage and graphics on the ticket. A quote goes to the customer before any part is ordered, a job waiting on a part sits in Awaiting Parts with a date and a purchase order behind it, and the balance settles at a point of sale that also sells refurbished machines and accessories. Parts are counted by quantity; machines you stock are tracked one by one by serial. It runs in any browser, it is hosted in London, and it costs from £39 a month excluding VAT. - Monday morning a laptop comes in that will not power on. It is booked in by make, model and serial number, with the processor, memory and storage recorded on the ticket so the machine that leaves is provably the machine that arrived. - After an hour of diagnosis the fault is a failed board component. A quote goes to the customer before any part is ordered, and nothing on the ticket moves until they approve it. If they come back asking for a cheaper option, the quote is revised rather than retyped. - The part is not on the shelf, so the ticket sits in Awaiting Parts while a purchase order goes out. That is a normal state, with its own date, not a job someone has to remember. Thursday the part arrives, is booked in against the order, the repair is finished and the balance settles at collection. ##### Computer repair tracking, from diagnosis to collection The states a bench job actually passes through, each one visible on the ticket and in the queue. - **Booked in**: Make, model, serial and the fault described. - **Diagnosed**: Findings on the ticket, in the technician's words. - **Quote sent**: Priced before the work, approved before the part. - **Awaiting parts**: A status with a date, tied to the purchase order. - **Repaired**: Parts used come off stock and onto the job. - **Collected**: Balance settled against any deposit already taken. A job sent out to a specialist (a board-level repair, a data recovery lab) is marked Outsourced and stays on the queue, so it is still your ticket and still your customer while it is away. ##### Serial numbers and payments you can inspect Real screens from the product, whose figures check against each other. ##### A device unit's history One machine by serial: what it cost, what it sold for, its condition, and the stock ledger that recorded it arriving and leaving. The same record shape holds a refurbished laptop as holds a phone. ##### A split-payment receipt One bill settled across card and cash, with the deposit taken at booking already counted. The tenders add up to the total and the balance lands on zero. ##### A report total, and its source The revenue figure and the invoices it is made of, on the same screen. A report is the same number as the invoices, traced, not a separate number typed in. ##### Quotes that are agreed, parts that are tracked, machines that are yours What a computer shop owner notices after the first month. - **No surprise at collection**: The quote the customer approved is on the ticket, and the bill is built from it. - **Parts on order are visible**: Awaiting Parts is a status with a date and a purchase order behind it, not a note. - **Serials that match**: The machine is booked in by serial, so the one that leaves is the one that arrived. - **Refurbished stock costed**: A machine you rebuild to sell is its own unit with its own cost and price. - **A month you can close**: Figures open onto the records behind them, so month-end is checking rather than rebuilding. ##### PC and laptop repair shop software: what you get ##### Repairs One ticket per job, from booked in to collected, with diagnosis and quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with a date, tied to the order that will clear it. ##### Laptops by serial Processor, memory, storage and screen on the record, brand list built in. ##### Desktops and all-in-ones Tower or all-in-one, with graphics and form factor recorded. ##### Consoles too Storage, edition and controllers included, on the same ticket shape. ##### Parts by quantity Memory, drives and cables counted; machines tracked one by one. ##### Point of sale for the counter Repairs, accessories and refurbished machines on one sale, split tender. ##### Deposits and balances Money taken at booking counts against the bill at collection. ##### Customer updates Email from the job, and a QR code on the receipt that opens a live repair status page. ##### Reports & tax Figures that open onto the records that produced them. An AI summary of your reports in plain English. ##### Stocktake Count against a snapshot; stock moves only once approved. ##### More than one branch One login across shops, with stock and staff kept per branch. ##### What computer shop owners ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **What is computer repair shop software?** It is the system a computer repair shop runs the job and the counter on: booking a machine in by serial, recording the diagnosis, sending a quote, ordering the part, tracking the repair status and taking payment. In SlickCell those steps sit on one ticket, with stock and the till in the same web app. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. **Can I quote before I do the work?** Yes. A ticket can carry a quote that is sent to the customer and sits at Quote Sent until they approve it. If they ask for a different option the quote is revised on the same ticket. Nothing is ordered and no part comes off stock until the approved version is converted into the job. **Half my jobs are waiting on a part. How is that handled?** Awaiting Parts is a status of its own, with the date the job entered it, so the queue shows what is waiting and for how long. The purchase order for the part is raised in the same system, and when it arrives it is booked in against that order and the job can move on. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **What about a job I send out to a specialist?** Mark it Outsourced. The ticket stays on your queue and the customer stays yours, so when the machine comes back the job carries on from where it was rather than being booked in again. The status is visible in the queue the whole time it is away, with the rest of the job's history intact. **We sell refurbished laptops as well as fixing them. Does that fit?** Yes. A machine you rebuild is its own unit with its own cost, so when it sells the margin is real rather than estimated. If it was bought second-hand, cost and selling price are held per unit and margin-scheme tax is reported separately from standard tax. That is general information rather than tax advice. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. --- ## For desktop repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/desktop-repair-shops #### Desktop repair shop software for towers, all-in-ones and mini PCs A tower, an iMac and a mini PC are three different jobs. SlickCell books each against a desktop-only model list, and keeps the desktops you stock in a category of their own, with processor, memory, graphics and form factor on the record. #### A gaming tower that will not boot, and an iMac behind it - SlickCell is desktop repair shop software for UK shops that fix towers, all-in-ones and mini PCs alongside laptops, phones and tablets. Desktop / All-in-One is a device type of its own, with more than 450 desktop models to pick from once it is chosen, and it never suggests a laptop model. iMacs are listed by screen size and year, from the iMac 21.5" (2013) to the iMac 24" (M4, 2024), beside all-in-ones such as the HP EliteOne, the Dell OptiPlex All-in-One and the Surface Studio. Mini PCs from Beelink, Minisforum, Geekom, Intel NUC and Zotac are desktops here, not laptops. So are gaming towers and workstations: Alienware Aurora, Corsair Vengeance, Dell Precision, Fujitsu Celsius, Mac Pro and Mac Studio. - Monday a gaming tower comes in that powers on and shows nothing. It is booked as Desktop / All-in-One, the model is picked from the Alienware list, and its serial number goes on the ticket. After diagnosis the fault is the graphics card. A quote for a replacement goes to the customer, and the ticket waits at Quote Sent until they approve it. - The card is not on the shelf, so the ticket sits in Awaiting Parts while a purchase order goes out. When it arrives it is booked in against that order, fitted, and taken off stock onto the job. Behind it on the bench an all-in-one needs a new power supply, on a ticket of its own. ##### From the bench to collection, on one ticket The states a desktop job passes through, each one visible on the ticket and in the queue. - **Booked in**: Desktop / All-in-One, the model from the desktop list, and the serial. - **Diagnosed**: What failed, written on the ticket. - **Quote sent**: A graphics card or power supply priced before it is ordered. - **Awaiting parts**: A status of its own, tied to the purchase order. - **Repaired**: The part comes off stock and onto the job. - **Collected**: Any deposit taken at booking counts against the bill. A board-level fault you send to a specialist is marked Outsourced and stays on your queue while it is away, so the customer is still yours. ##### Three screens a desktop job passes through Real captures from the product: the ticket, the part on order and the stock list. ##### The ticket, the parts and the bill together One repair ticket: the machine and its reference, the parts used with their cost and margin, the bill with what is paid and what is due, and the button that updates the customer. ##### A part on order, then received The purchase order for the part, with what was ordered against what arrived, and the goods-received note that booked it in. ##### Stock, by category The stock list with its type and category filters: parts and accessories counted by quantity, machines counted from their own units. A desktop you stock lands in Desktops by default. ##### Desktops kept apart from laptops, and parts that are tracked What a desktop shop owner notices after the first month. - **The right model list**: Pick Desktop / All-in-One and the model list holds desktops only, with no laptops to scroll past. - **Mini PCs where you look for them**: A Beelink or an Intel NUC is found under desktops, not laptops. - **Desktops apart in stock**: A desktop you stock defaults to the Desktops category, so the stock list filters it apart from laptops. - **Form factor, not screen size**: A desktop record asks for form factor, all-in-one or tower, where a laptop record asks for screen size. - **Parts on order are visible**: Awaiting Parts is a status with a date and a purchase order behind it, not a note. ##### Built for towers, all-in-ones and mini PCs ##### Repairs Power supplies, graphics cards and machines that will not boot: one ticket per job, with the quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with a date, tied to the order that will clear it. ##### Towers and workstations Alienware, Corsair, Dell Precision and Fujitsu Celsius models in the desktop list. ##### All-in-ones and iMacs iMacs by screen size and year, beside HP, Dell, Lenovo and MSI all-in-ones. ##### Mini PCs Beelink, Minisforum, Geekom, Intel NUC and Zotac, listed as desktops. ##### The build on record Processor, memory, storage, graphics and form factor on every desktop you stock or buy in. ##### Parts by quantity Power supplies, graphics cards, memory and drives counted; machines tracked one by one. ##### Purchase orders Order the part, then book in what arrived against that order. ##### A till for the counter Repairs, accessories and refurbished machines on one sale, split across card and cash. ##### Deposits and balances Money taken at booking counts against the bill at collection. ##### Customer updates Email from the job, and a QR code on every receipt that opens live tracking. ##### What desktop shop owners ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Is a desktop its own device type, or a laptop under another name?** Its own. Desktop / All-in-One is a device type with a model list of more than 450 desktops and all-in-ones, so choosing it never offers a laptop model. Its record asks for processor, memory, storage, graphics and form factor, and a desktop you stock goes into the Desktops category rather than Laptops. **Where do mini PCs and all-in-ones go?** Under desktops. Mini PCs from Beelink, Minisforum, Geekom, Intel NUC and Zotac are in the desktop list, and so are all-in-ones: iMacs by screen size and year, the HP EliteOne, the Dell OptiPlex All-in-One and the Surface Studio. A model that is not listed can be typed in and added to your shop's own list. **Can I quote before I fit a new graphics card or power supply?** Yes. The ticket carries a quote that goes to the customer and sits at Quote Sent until they approve it, so the price is agreed before you order anything. The part is then ordered on a purchase order, the job waits in Awaiting Parts, and fitting it takes the part off stock and onto the ticket. **We fix laptops too. Does that fit?** Yes, in the same system. Laptop is a device type of its own, with its own model list and fields, so a shop that fixes both books each machine under its own type. The page for computer repair shops covers laptop and desktop work together. **How do customers get repair updates?** By text or email from the job, on templates each shop can edit. Every receipt and repair label also carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. --- ## For tablet repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/tablet-repair-shops #### Tablet repair shop software for iPad and Android repairs SlickCell is tablet repair shop software that takes a serial number or an IMEI at booking, whichever the tablet shows, and sells each refurbished tablet as its own unit, with its generation and connectivity on the record. #### An iPad with a cracked screen, and a trade-in on the counter - SlickCell is built for UK shops that repair iPads and Android tablets as well as phones, laptops and consoles. Tablet is a device type of its own, with more than 550 tablet models to pick from once it is chosen, and a tablet never suggests phone models. At booking, one field takes the serial number or the IMEI, whichever the tablet shows, so a Wi-Fi-only iPad is booked by its serial and a cellular one by its IMEI or serial. Surface Pro, Surface Go and Amazon Fire are in the tablet list; Surface Laptop and Surface Book are in the laptop list. The job moves through quote sent, awaiting parts and completed on one ticket. A refurbished tablet you sell is its own stock unit with its own IMEI or serial, cost, condition and price, and if you bought it second-hand the VAT margin scheme is worked out from that unit's own cost. - Saturday morning an iPad comes in with a cracked screen. It is booked as a Tablet, the model is picked from the Apple tablet list, where older iPads are listed separately as Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi + Cellular models, and its serial number goes in the one identifier field, because a Wi-Fi-only iPad has no IMEI to give. - A quote for a new screen and digitiser goes to the customer, and the ticket waits at Quote Sent until they approve it. The screen is not on the shelf, so the job sits in Awaiting Parts until it arrives. Fitting it takes the part off stock and onto the ticket. - At collection the customer trades in an old cellular tablet. It is recorded as a buyback with device type Tablet, its IMEI or serial in its own field, and its connectivity, screen size and generation beside it. Once it is approved and paid for, it enters stock as its own unit at what you paid, ready to sell under the margin scheme. ##### Booked by IMEI or serial, sold as a unit The states a tablet passes through, from the counter to the bench and back to the shelf. - **Booked in**: Device type Tablet, the model from the tablet list, and the serial or IMEI. - **Quoted**: Priced before the work and approved before the part is ordered. - **Awaiting parts**: A status of its own, so a job waiting on a screen is visible in the queue. - **Repaired**: Parts used come off stock and onto the job. - **Collected**: Any deposit taken at booking counts against the bill. - **Refurbished and sold**: A traded-in tablet is sold as its own unit, at its own cost. The customer hears how the job is going by email, and every receipt and repair label carries a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. ##### The screens a tablet passes through Real captures from the product: the booking step, the stock unit and the tax rule. ##### One field for serial or IMEI Step two of a new ticket. Choose the device type first and the brand and model lists follow it. The serial number or IMEI goes in one field, whichever the device shows, in full or just the last digits. ##### A refurbished tablet, unit by unit Each unit you stock has its own IMEI or serial number, storage, colour, condition, cost and selling price. A tablet unit also carries connectivity, screen size and generation. ##### The margin scheme as a rule A standard rate as the default, and a margin rule scoped to used stock. A second-hand tablet sold under it is taxed on the margin between what that unit cost you and what it sold for. ##### The right model, the right number, the right margin What a tablet shop owner notices after the first month. - **The right model list**: Pick Tablet and the model list holds tablets only, with older iPads split into Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi + Cellular models. - **Wi-Fi tablets book in cleanly**: The serial goes in the same field an IMEI would, so nothing is left blank. - **Trade-ins with the details that price them**: Connectivity, screen size and generation sit on the buyback record beside the IMEI or serial. - **Tablets in their own stock category**: A tablet you stock defaults to the Tablets category, and the stock list filters on it. - **Margin from the unit's own cost**: A second-hand tablet's margin comes from what you paid for that one unit. ##### Built for the bench and the counter ##### Repairs Screen and digitiser replacements, batteries and charging ports: one ticket per job, with the quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with a date, so a tablet waiting on a screen is never a note on the bench. ##### Wi-Fi or cellular Connectivity, screen size and generation on every tablet you stock or buy in. ##### Surface and Fire included Surface Pro, Surface Go and Amazon Fire are in the tablet list; Surface Laptop and Surface Book are laptops. ##### Parts by quantity Screens, batteries and charging ports counted; tablets tracked one by one. ##### Trade-ins Buy a tablet from a customer, inspect it, pay, and it enters stock at its real cost. ##### Margin scheme per unit Second-hand tablets taxed on the margin, worked out from each unit's own cost. ##### A till for the counter Repairs, accessories and refurbished tablets on one sale, split across card and cash. ##### Find a unit fast Search stock by name, category, IMEI or serial number. ##### Customer updates Email from the job, and a QR code on every receipt that opens live tracking. ##### What tablet shop owners ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Can I book a Wi-Fi-only tablet by its serial number, with no IMEI?** Yes. The booking field takes a serial number or an IMEI, whichever the tablet shows, in full or just the last digits. A serial with letters in it is saved as a serial number. For a tablet you stock or buy in, Connectivity (Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi and cellular) is a field on the record, beside screen size and generation. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **Does SlickCell run on an iPad?** Yes. SlickCell is web-based and runs in any modern browser on a computer, tablet or phone, so there is nothing to install on the iPad. Sign in at the counter and the same shop, repair queue and till are there as on any other device. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. --- ## For games console repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/console-repair-shops #### Game console repair software that tracks every console by serial SlickCell is game console repair software that books every console in by its serial number, sells refurbished consoles as their own units and takes trade-ins on the same system. #### One console, from the counter to the shelf - SlickCell is built for UK shops that fix and sell PlayStation, Xbox and Nintendo consoles alongside phones, tablets and laptops. A games console is its own device type in SlickCell, with more than 250 console models to pick from, handheld gaming PCs such as Steam Deck included, and its own fields on every console you stock or buy in: storage, edition (disc or digital) and controllers included. It is identified by its serial number. At booking there is one field for "Serial No. / IMEI", and a serial with letters in it is saved as a serial number, not squeezed into an IMEI. The job moves through quote, awaiting parts and repaired on one ticket, and the ticket is assigned to the technician doing the work. When you refurbish a console to sell, it goes into stock as its own unit with its own serial, cost and price, and the till finds it when you type or scan that serial. - Monday morning a Nintendo Switch 2 comes in running hot and loud: it needs a fan clean and fresh thermal paste. It is booked in as device type Games Console, and the brand and model lists offer console makers and console models only. The serial is typed as printed on the sticker under the stand. It starts with letters, so it is saved as a serial number and the ticket shows it as S/N. - The work is quoted before it starts, and nothing moves until the customer approves. The ticket is assigned to a technician, the paste and any part used come off stock onto the job, and the balance settles at collection against any deposit taken at booking. - Later that week a customer trades in a PlayStation 5 Digital Edition. It is inspected and bought on a buyback record with device type Games Console, its serial in the free-text IMEI / Serial field, and the edition and the controllers included recorded with it. The seller is paid in cash, by bank transfer or as trade-in credit against a sale. Added to inventory, it becomes a stock unit at what it cost you, the price paid plus any refurbishment, and it sells at the till when someone types or scans its serial. ##### Booked, repaired, refurbished and sold by serial number HDMI port replacements, disc drive replacements, fan cleans with fresh thermal paste and controllers with stick drift: each job passes through the same states, on the ticket and in the queue. - **Booked in by serial**: Device type Games Console, brand, model (disc and digital are separate models) and the serial as printed. - **Quoted and assigned**: Priced before the work, approved before the part, given to a technician. - **Repaired**: The part used comes off stock and onto the job. - **Collected**: Balance settled against any deposit taken at booking. - **Refurbished to sell**: A console you rebuild is its own stock unit: serial, cost, condition, price. - **Sold or traded in**: The till finds the unit by its serial; a trade-in becomes a unit at what it cost you. Serial search at the till and in stock needs four or more characters with at least one digit. ##### The till and the stock list, on real screens Real captures from the product. The shop in them sells phones and accessories; a console sits in the same list and is found by the same search. ##### One search box for name, SKU or serial The till searches products by name or SKU and stock units by serial from the same box. A refurbished console comes up as its own unit, and only a unit still in stock can go on the sale. ##### Stock by category, units by serial Parts and accessories are counted by quantity; devices are counted from their units. A console you add defaults to the category Consoles, so the list filters consoles on their own, and the search box finds a unit by its serial. ##### What changes What a console shop owner notices after the first month. - **Serials that match at collection**: The console is booked in by its serial, so the one handed back is the one that came in. - **Refurbished consoles costed per unit**: A console you rebuild to sell carries its own cost and price, so its margin is real. - **Trade-ins become stock at their cost**: A console bought over the counter enters stock at the price paid plus any refurbishment. - **Who is on which console**: The repairs queue shows the technician on every job and filters by technician. ##### Built for the bench and the counter ##### Repairs One ticket per job, from booked in to collected, with the quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with a date, so a job waiting on a drive is never forgotten. ##### Consoles by serial A serial with letters is saved as a serial and shown on the ticket as S/N. ##### Handhelds too Steam Deck, ROG Ally, Legion Go, MSI Claw and retro handhelds are in the console list. ##### Trade-ins Inspect, pay by cash, transfer or credit, and the console enters stock at its cost. ##### Parts by quantity Fans, drives, ports and paste counted; consoles tracked one by one. ##### A till for the counter Repairs, accessories and refurbished consoles on one sale. ##### Deposits and balances Money taken at booking counts against the bill at collection. ##### Customer updates Email the customer from the job; the QR on the receipt opens live tracking. ##### Stocktake Count against a snapshot; stock moves only once approved. ##### Find a unit by serial Type or scan a serial in stock or at the till to find that one console. ##### More than one branch One login across shops, with stock and staff kept per branch. ##### What console shop owners ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **How does SlickCell record a console's serial number?** Exactly as it is printed on the console. At booking, one field takes the serial number or the IMEI, and a serial with letters in it is saved as a serial number and shown on the ticket as S/N. In stock, each unit's reference is free text labelled IMEI / Serial, with no format check, so a console serial goes in as printed. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **Can I use it for consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Games Console is one of SlickCell's device types, beside phones, tablets, smartwatches, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, and earbuds and headphones. Each type has its own brands, models and specification fields, and one ticket, one till and one stock list cover them all. **Can I buy consoles from customers and resell them?** Yes. A trade-in is a buyback record with the console's type, brand, model, serial, edition and controllers, an inspection and a payment in cash, by bank transfer or as trade-in credit. Added to inventory, it becomes a stock unit at what it cost you, ready to sell at the till. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. Sign up with your name, email address and a password and the fourteen-day trial starts straight away, with every feature included and no card. --- ## For smartwatch repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/smartwatch-repair-shops #### Smartwatch repair software for repair shops Screens, batteries and straps on one ticket, every watch you stock recorded by case size, material and connectivity, and refurbished watches sold as their own units. #### A cracked watch screen and a strap at the counter - SlickCell is smartwatch repair software for UK shops that repair watches and wearables alongside phones, tablets and laptops. A smartwatch is its own device type, with more than 650 watch models to pick from, fitness bands and smart rings included, and the fields that tell two watches apart on every watch you stock or buy in: case size, case material, band and connectivity (GPS, or GPS and cellular). At booking, one field takes the serial number or the IMEI, so a GPS-only watch is booked by its serial number and a cellular one by its serial or IMEI. A screen, a battery or a strap is quoted and approved on one ticket, and the part used comes off stock. Straps and batteries you sell over the counter are counted by quantity; a refurbished watch is its own unit with its own serial, cost and price. - A customer brings in a watch with a cracked screen. It is booked in as device type Smartwatch, and the brand and model lists offer watch makers and watch models only; older Apple Watch models are listed by case size, such as Watch 42mm (1st gen). Its serial goes in the one field for serial number or IMEI, and a serial with letters in it is saved as a serial number. - The screen is quoted before the work starts, and nothing moves until the customer approves. If the screen is not on the shelf, the ticket waits in Awaiting Parts with the date it went there while the order is out. When it arrives, the screen comes off stock onto the job. - At collection the customer wants a new strap as well. It is added to the same ticket from stock, so the screen, the strap and the labour are on one bill, settled against any deposit taken at booking. ##### Booked, quoted, repaired and collected on one ticket Screen replacements, battery replacements, new straps, back glass and sensor repairs: good watch repair software keeps every one of them on the ticket and in the queue. - **Booked in**: Device type Smartwatch, brand and model from the watch list, the serial or IMEI in one field. - **Quote sent**: Priced before the work, approved before the part. - **Awaiting parts**: A status with a date while the screen or battery is on order. - **Repaired**: The part used comes off stock and onto the job. - **Collected**: A strap from stock on the same bill, the balance settled against any deposit. Straps, batteries and screens are counted by quantity. A watch you refurbish to sell is its own unit, with its serial, case size, connectivity, cost and price. ##### The counter and the stock list, on real screens Real captures from the product. The shop in them sells phones and accessories; a watch strap and a refurbished watch sit in the same lists. ##### Accessories at the till Accessories go on a sale by quantity, each line with its price and tax, adding up to the total. A strap sold over the counter is one of these lines, and a refurbished watch is found by its serial from the same search box. ##### Wearables as their own category Parts and accessories are counted by quantity; devices are counted from their units. A watch you add defaults to the category Wearables, so the stock list filters watches on their own, and the search box finds a unit by its serial. ##### What changes What a watch repair shop owner notices after the first month. - **Two watches told apart**: Case size, case material, band and connectivity sit on every watch you stock or buy in. - **Parts on order are visible**: Awaiting Parts is a status with a date, not a note on the bench. - **One bill at collection**: The repair, the strap and the labour sit on one ticket and one bill. - **Straps counted, watches tracked**: Straps and batteries by quantity; every refurbished watch by its own serial and cost. ##### Built for the bench and the counter ##### Repairs One ticket per job, from booked in to collected, with the quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with a date, so a job waiting on a screen is never forgotten. ##### Parts by quantity Screens, batteries and straps counted; watches tracked one by one. ##### A till for the counter Straps, chargers and refurbished watches sold over the counter. ##### Case size and connectivity Case size, material, band and GPS or cellular on every watch you stock. ##### Rings and bands too Fitness bands and smart rings are in the watch list, with the same fields. ##### Trade-ins A watch bought over the counter keeps its case size and connectivity beside its serial. ##### What watch repair shops ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Can I record a watch's case size and connectivity?** Yes, on every watch you stock or buy in. A smartwatch is its own device type, and its stock unit or trade-in record carries case size, case material, band and connectivity. At booking for a repair, the model is picked from a watch catalogue and the serial number or IMEI goes in one field, so GPS-only and cellular watches are both covered. **Can I use it for smartwatches and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Smartwatch is one of SlickCell's device types, beside phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, and earbuds and headphones. Each type has its own brands, models and specification fields, and one ticket, one till and one stock list cover them all. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Can I see it before I sign up?** Yes. Book a demo and we will spend thirty minutes on your own repair and stock workflow, or start the fourteen-day trial yourself, with every feature included and no card. --- ## For earbud and headphone repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/earbuds-headphones-repair-shops #### Headphone repair shop software for earbuds and over-ears Earbuds and headphones have a serial number, not an IMEI. SlickCell books each pair in by serial, keeps noise cancelling and how it charges on the stock record, and sells refurbished pairs as their own units. #### A charging case that will not charge, and a pair traded in - SlickCell is headphone repair shop software for shops that fix earbuds and headphones alongside phones, tablets and laptops. Earbuds & Headphones is its own device type, with more than 450 models to pick from: earbuds, over-ears, studio headphones and office headsets. The model list tells apart the variants that matter at the bench, such as AirPods 4 with and without Active Noise Cancellation, and AirPods Pro (2nd generation) before and after USB-C. The stock and trade-in records carry the fields that tell two pairs apart: connectivity, noise cancelling and how the pair charges. Earbuds have no IMEI, so they are booked in by serial number, in the one field that takes a serial or an IMEI. A battery or a charging case is quoted and approved on one ticket, and the part used comes off stock. A refurbished pair you sell is its own stock unit with its own serial, cost and price. - Monday morning a pair of AirPods Pro arrives with a case that will not charge. It is booked in as Earbuds & Headphones, brand Apple, and the model is picked from the list: AirPods Pro (2nd generation, USB-C), not the earlier Lightning version. The serial goes in as printed, and what came in with the pair (both buds, the case, no cable) goes in the condition notes. - The case repair is quoted before any work starts, and the ticket sits at Quote Sent until the customer agrees. The replacement case is not on the shelf, so the job moves to Awaiting Parts, a status with its own date. When the repair is done, the part used comes off stock and onto the job. - That afternoon a customer trades in a pair of over-ear headphones. They go on a trade-in record with the device type set, the serial in the IMEI / Serial field, and connectivity, noise cancelling and charging filled in. Added to stock, the pair becomes its own unit, costed at what you paid plus any refurbishment, and it sells later at the till, found by its serial. ##### Booked by serial, sold as a unit The jobs an audio bench sees every week: batteries, charging cases and charging ports, ear cushions and headbands. Each one passes through the same states on one ticket. - **Booked in by serial**: Type, brand and model from the audio list; the serial as printed. - **Quoted**: Priced before the work; the ticket waits at Quote Sent. - **Awaiting parts**: A status with a date, not a note on the side. - **Repaired**: The battery or case used comes off stock onto the job. - **Collected**: Completed, paid and handed back, with the history kept. - **Refurbished and sold**: A traded-in pair becomes a stock unit, sold by its serial. ##### The screens a pair goes through Real screens from the product. A pair of earbuds uses the same records as every other device. ##### Booking in, by serial Step two of a new ticket. Choose Earbuds & Headphones as the device type and the brand and model lists offer audio makers and models only. The serial goes in the one field beside them. ##### A trade-in, through to stock Each buy is inspected, approved, paid and added to stock. With the device type set to Earbuds & Headphones, the form asks for connectivity, noise cancelling and charging. ##### One unit, its own cost and price A stock item and the units under it, each with its own serial, cost and selling price, and the movements that brought it in and sent it out. ##### What changes What an earbud and headphone shop notices after the first month. - **The right model on the ticket**: AirPods Pro before and after USB-C are two models in the list, so the ticket names the pair on the bench. - **A serial on every pair**: Booked in by serial, so the pair that leaves is the pair that arrived. - **Audio stock in one place**: An audio stock item defaults to the category Audio, and the stock list filters on it. - **Quotes agreed first**: The quote the customer agreed is on the ticket before the case is opened. - **Trade-ins costed**: A pair you buy in is a unit at what you paid, so its margin is real when it sells. ##### Built for the bench and the counter ##### Earbuds & Headphones Its own device type, with more than 450 models and audio makers only. ##### Every variant in the list AirPods 4 with and without noise cancelling, AirPods Pro before and after USB-C: separate models. ##### Noise cancelling and charging Connectivity, noise cancelling and charging type on the stock and trade-in record. ##### Repairs One ticket per job, from booked in to collected, with the quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with a date, so a job waiting on a case is visible. ##### Parts by quantity Batteries, cushions and cases counted; pairs for sale tracked one by one. ##### Trade-ins Buy a pair in with its serial and specs, then add it to stock at cost. ##### A till for the counter Repairs, accessories and refurbished pairs on one sale, split tender. ##### What earbud and headphone repairers ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Can I record noise cancelling and how a pair charges?** Yes. Earbuds and headphones are their own device type, and their stock and trade-in records carry connectivity, noise cancelling and the charging type, such as USB-C or MagSafe. The model comes from an audio list that keeps variants apart, so AirPods Pro before and after USB-C are two models. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **Can I use it for consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, smartwatches, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, earbuds and headphones, and games consoles are each a device type with its own brand list and spec fields, and anything else goes under Other. A repair ticket, a stock unit and a trade-in work the same way for every type. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Do I need a card to start the trial?** No. You create an account and the fourteen-day trial starts on the plan you choose, with every feature switched on. A card is only asked for when you decide to pay, from the billing settings. --- ## For electronics repair shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/electronics-repair-shops #### Electronics repair shop software, by IMEI or serial SlickCell is electronics repair shop software for the morning a phone, a laptop, a games console and a smartwatch all come in: each booked in by its type and its IMEI or serial number, and each run through the same ticket, invoices and cash drawer. #### Electronics repair software for every device type - SlickCell is built for shops that fix more than phones. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list and the spec fields that matter for it. Every device you stock carries its own IMEI or serial number, searchable at the till and in stock. The job runs on one repair ticket: the fault described at the counter, a quote the customer approves, parts taken from stock, and handover with the balance settled against any deposit, into the same cash drawer as your accessory and refurbished sales. If you were looking for electronics repair shop management software, this is the whole of it in one web app, hosted in London, from £39 a month excluding VAT. - Nine o'clock: a phone with a cracked screen, booked in by IMEI or serial, the damage marked on the intake checklist and the new screen taken off stock onto the ticket. Half nine: a laptop that will not start, booked in by serial, its hinge, keyboard and trackpad checked at the counter, and a quote sent before any part is ordered. - Ten o'clock: a games console with its controllers ticked off as received. The part it needs is on a purchase order, so the ticket sits in Awaiting Parts with the date it went in. Eleven: a smartwatch booked in by serial, its strap and health sensors checked at the counter. Four devices, four types, one queue. ##### Track repairs from booking to handover The same states for a phone, a laptop or a console, each one visible on the ticket and in the queue. - **Booked in**: Type, make, model, IMEI or serial, and the fault. - **Diagnosed**: Findings on the ticket, in the technician's words. - **Quote sent**: Priced before the work, with the customer's agreement recorded. - **Awaiting parts**: A status of its own, with the date the job entered it. - **Repaired**: Parts used come off stock and onto the job. - **Collected**: Balance settled against any deposit already taken. A job sent to a specialist is marked Outsourced, with the specialist's name on it, and stays on your queue with your customer and its history intact. ##### Serial numbers and device information you can inspect Real screens from the product, whose figures check against each other. ##### A device unit's history One unit by IMEI or serial: what it cost, what it sold for, its condition, and the stock ledger that recorded it arriving and leaving. ##### A settled invoice Each line with its quantity, price and tax, and the payments received against it, so what was charged and what was paid sit on one page. ##### A report total, and its source The revenue figure and the invoices it is made of, on the same screen. A report is the same number as the invoices, traced, not a separate number typed in. ##### Customers informed, stock levels right, invoices that add up What an electronics repair shop owner notices after the first month. - **Repair status without a phone call**: The repair ticket and its label carry a QR code that opens a live tracking page, with no app and no login. - **Updates from the job**: Email a customer from the ticket on a template, and keep the record. - **Stock levels that match**: Parts by quantity, devices by unit, so the shelf and the system agree. - **Quotes that are agreed**: When a quote is approved, the agreed total and how the customer agreed it are recorded on the ticket. - **A month you can close**: Figures open onto the records behind them. ##### Built for the whole electronics bench ##### Phones and tablets IMEI or serial on every unit, with network, battery health and connectivity on the stock record. ##### Laptops and desktops Processor, memory, storage and graphics on the stock record. ##### Games consoles Storage, edition and controllers on the stock record, and controllers checked in at the counter. ##### Smartwatches and earbuds Case size, band, connectivity and charging on the stock record. ##### Repairs One ticket per job, with the diagnosis and the quote on it. ##### Awaiting parts A real status with the date the job entered it. ##### Parts by quantity Screens, batteries, drives and cables counted; devices tracked one by one. ##### Invoices and the till Deposits and part payments on the invoice, card and cash split at the till. ##### Refurbished and traded-in stock Each device with its own cost, margin and condition. ##### Customer updates Email from the job, and a QR tracking page. ##### Staff rotas and payroll inputs Shifts, attendance and leave recorded; hours priced into a payslip. ##### More than one shop Stock and staff kept per branch, under one login. ##### What electronics repair shops ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Can I use it for laptops, consoles and other electronics, not only phones?** Yes. Phones, tablets, laptops, desktops and all-in-ones, games consoles, smartwatches, earbuds and headphones are device types in their own right, each with its own brand list. The intake checklist changes with the type, so a laptop is checked for its hinge and keyboard and a console for its controllers. Every device is booked in by its IMEI or serial number. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **What if a device is not one of the listed types?** Book it in as Other. It is still its own record with its own serial number, make, model, fault and history, and it runs through the same ticket, stock and invoices as every other device. Other is one of the eight device types, next to phone, tablet, laptop, desktop, games console, smartwatch, and earbuds and headphones. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. **Can I move to SlickCell from another system?** Yes. Parts, accessories and devices import from CSV with a preview of exactly what will be written before anything is saved. Most shops finish open repairs on the old system and start new work in SlickCell from go-live. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **Can I see it working before I commit?** Yes, two ways. Book a demo and we will walk through your own repair and stock workflow on a call, or start the fourteen-day free trial yourself, with no card needed, and book a real device in. --- ## For phone shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/phone-shops #### POS system for phone shops A shop that sells phones, cases and chargers all day, and takes the odd repair, needs a till first. This one counts accessories by the box and tracks every phone on its own. #### Forty sales before lunch - SlickCell is a POS system for phone shops: the till, the stock and the cash drawer in one web app. Cases, screen protectors and chargers are scanned off a barcode and counted by quantity. Every handset is its own unit with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition and price, so a refurbished phone sells as itself and not as one of a count. Trade-ins go into stock at their real cost, second-hand sales can use the UK VAT margin scheme, and the drawer closes on a count. In the US the same thing is searched for as cell phone store POS software; in the UK it is usually called a phone shop EPOS. From £39 a month excluding VAT, hosted in London. - Nine o'clock. A case, a screen protector and a charging cable go through in one sale, scanned off the shelf, each coming off a quantity. The next customer buys a refurbished handset: that one is a single unit with its own IMEI or serial number, its own cost and its own price, and it leaves stock as itself rather than as one of a count. - Half ten. A regular asks for money off. The assistant on the till picks a discount the shop has defined, with a start date, an expiry, a usage limit and a cart minimum, and the server checks all four before it is applied. There is no free-text box for knocking a tenner off. - Midday. A customer trades in their old handset against a new one. It is costed and graded there and then and goes into stock as a unit, ready to sell. At close the drawer is counted against what the till says it should hold, and the difference, if there is one, is a figure rather than an argument. ##### Point of sale for a phone store, from scan to count From the first scan to the counted drawer, each step writes to the next. - **Scanned**: Accessories off a barcode, handsets by their IMEI or serial. - **Discounted**: From a rule the shop defined, checked on the server. - **Paid**: Card, cash, or both against one sale, with change recorded. - **Traded in**: Costed, graded and on the shelf as a unit. - **Reordered**: Accessories below their reorder level show up for a purchase order. - **Counted**: The drawer closed on a count, the difference visible. A staff phone can be paired to the till from a QR code and used as a scanner for the open sale, so a busy counter does not need a second scanner bought for it. ##### EPOS hardware: use what you already have A scanner, a printer and a card machine, the ones already on your counter. - **Barcode scanner**: Any USB barcode scanner that types into the till works as it would in any other program. And a staff phone can be paired to the till from a QR code on screen and used as a scanner for the open sale, with no app to install and no hardware to buy. - **Receipt, invoice and label printer**: One document template prints as an A4 page, an 80mm or 58mm receipt roll, or a repair label on stock sizes from 50 by 25 up to 80mm, and the same document downloads as a PDF. Printing goes through the browser's own print dialog, so any printer the computer can already print to will work. SlickCell itself installs nothing. - **Card machine**: Keep the card machine you already have, from whichever provider gives you the best rate. Take the payment on the terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed, so the sale, the receipt and the day's report agree. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. ##### Sales data you can check against the till Real screens from the product, whose figures check against each other. ##### A split-payment receipt One sale settled across card and cash. The tenders add up to the total, the change is what went back over the counter, and the balance lands on zero: the case where money usually goes missing. ##### A device unit's history One handset by IMEI or serial: what it cost, what it sold for, its condition, and the stock ledger that recorded it arriving and leaving. Quantity is derived from units, never typed. ##### A report total, and its source The day's revenue and the sales it is made of, on the same screen. The rows add up to the total exactly, so the report is the till, traced. ##### A drawer that reconciles, a shelf that matches, discounts you can see What a phone shop owner notices after the first month. - **The drawer reconciles**: Opened on a float, closed on a count, with the difference shown rather than guessed. - **The shelf matches**: Accessories by quantity, handsets by unit, so the system and the stockroom stop drifting apart. - **Discounts are rules**: Each has a start, an expiry, a usage limit and a cart minimum, and the server enforces them. - **Used stock is costed**: Each second-hand handset carries its own cost, so the margin on it is real. - **Reorders are not guessed**: Fast-moving accessories fall below their reorder level and show up to be ordered. ##### Phone shop EPOS software: what the till carries ##### The till Accessories, handsets and repairs on one sale, with split tender. ##### Scan to sell Barcodes for accessories; a staff phone can be the scanner. ##### Accessories by quantity Cases, cables and chargers counted by the box, with reorder levels. ##### Handsets by unit Every device its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost and price. ##### Used devices Cost, margin and margin-scheme tax held per handset. ##### Trade-ins Take a handset in against a sale and put it on the shelf as stock. ##### Discounts as rules Defined once, with expiry and usage limits, applied at the till. Professional and above. ##### Cash drawer Open on a float, close on a count, see the difference. ##### Invoices & payments Part payments, corrections and refunds as one financial history. ##### Repairs when you take them A repair ticket sits beside the sale, not in a separate system. ##### Stocktake Count against a snapshot; stock moves only once approved. ##### More than one shop One login across branches, with stock and staff kept per branch. ##### What phone shop owners ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **Is this a POS system for phone shops, or repair software with a till bolted on?** It is both, and the till is not an afterthought: accessories are scanned off a quantity, handsets are sold as individual units, and card and cash can be split across one sale. Repairs sit beside sales on the same record rather than in a second system, which suits a shop that sells most of the day and fixes some of it. **What is an EPOS system?** EPOS means electronic point of sale: the till, plus the stock and sales records behind it. In SlickCell the till, stock by serial or IMEI, accessories by quantity, trade-ins, the cash drawer and the reports are one system, so a sale moves the stock and the figures in the same step. **Do I really have to record every handset one at a time?** Handsets, yes, because two of the same model bought for different money are not the same stock, and the margin on a used one is only real if its own cost is known. Accessories are the opposite: a box of cases is a quantity with a reorder level. The system holds both shapes at once. **Can I stop staff giving discounts?** On Professional and above, discounts are rules the shop defines rather than an amount typed at the till. Each rule has a start date, an expiry, a usage limit and a cart minimum, and the server checks all four when it is applied, so a discount that has run out cannot be given again. Staff choose from the rules that exist; they do not invent one. **Does it work with a barcode scanner?** Yes. Any USB barcode scanner that types into the till works as it would in any other program. And a staff phone can be paired to the till from a QR code on screen and used as a scanner for the open sale, with no app to install and no hardware to buy. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. --- ## For electronics shops Source: https://slickcell.com/for/electronics-shops #### Electronics store POS and stock control SlickCell is an electronics store POS for laptops, tablets, phones and consoles sold as individual units by serial number or IMEI, and cables, cases and chargers counted by the box. One till and one drawer for both. #### An electronics store EPOS for devices and accessories - SlickCell is built for shops that sell laptops, tablets, phones, games consoles, smartwatches and headphones, and the cables, cases and chargers that go with them. Each device is its own unit with its own serial number or IMEI, its own cost and its own price, so the laptop that leaves the shop is the exact one on the receipt. Accessories are the other shape: counted by quantity and scanned off a barcode. Card and cash can be split across one sale, a trade-in goes into stock at its real cost, and the drawer closes on a count. In the UK this is usually called an EPOS; in the US, electronics store POS or electronic shop management software. Repairs, when you take them, run on a repair ticket in the same system and are paid into the same drawer. From £39 a month excluding VAT. - Ten o'clock. A refurbished laptop goes out with a sleeve and a mouse. The laptop is sold as itself, by its serial number, with its own cost behind the sale; the sleeve and the mouse come off a quantity. - Midday. A customer trades in a tablet against a new one. It is costed and graded at the counter and goes into stock as its own unit. At close the drawer is counted against what the till says it should hold, and any difference is a figure, not an argument. ##### Point of sale and stock control in one From the first scan to the counted drawer, each step writes to the next. - **Scanned**: Accessories off a barcode, devices by serial or IMEI. - **Paid**: Card, cash or both on one sale, change recorded. - **Traded in**: Costed, graded and on the shelf as a unit. - **Returned**: You choose where each returned item goes: the shelf, the supplier, or a holding area to be checked. - **Counted**: The drawer closed on a count, the difference visible. - **Reported**: The day's revenue opens onto the sales it came from. A staff phone can be paired to the till from a QR code and used as the scanner for the open sale. ##### Serial numbers and sales you can check Real screens from the product, whose figures check against each other. ##### A settled invoice One sale with each line's quantity, price and tax, and the payments received against it. The payments add up to the total, so what was charged and what was paid sit on one page. ##### A device unit's history One device by serial or IMEI: what it cost, what it sold for, its condition, and the stock ledger that recorded it arriving and leaving. ##### A report total, and its source The day's revenue and the sales it is made of, on the same screen. The rows add up to the total, so the report is the till, traced. ##### A drawer that reconciles and a shelf that matches What an electronics shop owner notices after the first month. - **The drawer reconciles**: Opened on a float, closed on a count. - **The shelf matches**: Accessories by quantity, devices by unit. - **Used stock is costed**: Each second-hand device carries its own cost, so its margin is real. - **Returns are decided**: Each returned item gets an outcome someone chose, and a doubtful one waits in a holding area until it is checked. - **Purchase history on the customer**: Sales, payments and refunds hang off the customer record. ##### EPOS hardware: use what you already have A scanner, a printer and a card machine, the ones already on your counter. - **Barcode scanner**: Any USB barcode scanner that types into the till works as it would in any other program. And a staff phone can be paired to the till from a QR code on screen and used as a scanner for the open sale, with no app to install and no hardware to buy. - **Receipt, invoice and label printer**: One document template prints as an A4 page, an 80mm or 58mm receipt roll, or a repair label on stock sizes from 50 by 25 up to 80mm, and the same document downloads as a PDF. Printing goes through the browser's own print dialog, so any printer the computer can already print to will work. SlickCell itself installs nothing. - **Card machine**: Keep the card machine you already have, from whichever provider gives you the best rate. Take the payment on the terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed, so the sale, the receipt and the day's report agree. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. ##### An electronics shop till, built for serialised stock ##### The till Devices and accessories on one sale, with card and cash split. ##### Scan to sell A USB scanner, or a staff phone paired to the till. ##### Accessories by quantity Cases, cables and chargers counted by the box. ##### Devices by unit Every laptop, tablet, phone or console its own record by serial or IMEI. ##### Used and refurbished Cost, margin and margin-scheme tax held per device. ##### Trade-ins Take a device in against a sale and stock it at its real cost. ##### Discount rules Start, expiry, usage limit and cart minimum, checked on the server. Professional and above. ##### Cash drawer Float, count, difference. ##### Controlled returns Every returned item has a destination someone chose. ##### Reorder levels Accessories at or below their reorder level are listed, ready for a purchase order. ##### Staff rotas and payroll inputs Shifts, attendance and leave recorded; hours priced into a payslip. ##### More than one shop Stock and staff kept per branch. ##### What electronics shop owners ask The questions shops ask before they switch, answered straight. **What is an EPOS system?** EPOS means electronic point of sale: the till, plus the stock and sales records behind it. In SlickCell the till, stock by serial or IMEI, accessories by quantity, trade-ins, the cash drawer and the reports are one system, so a sale moves the stock and the figures in the same step. **Does SlickCell track serial numbers as well as IMEIs?** Yes. Every device is its own record with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, condition, selling price and history. A phone is usually tracked by IMEI; a laptop, console, tablet or smartwatch by its serial number. Both are free text, so a partial or unusual reference from older stock is accepted. **Does SlickCell work with my card machine?** Yes, with the one you already have. Take the payment on your terminal and the till records it on the sale, split with cash if needed. SlickCell takes no cut of your card takings. **Can I run the POS on a computer?** Yes. SlickCell runs in a modern browser on the shop's computer, a tablet or a phone, with nothing to install. A USB barcode scanner works at the till as it does in any other program, and a staff phone can be paired to the till as a scanner for the open sale. **How much does SlickCell cost?** Starter is £39 a month, Professional £59 and Supplier Pro £99, all excluding VAT, or ten times the monthly price for a year. Every feature is on every plan; plans differ by team size, locations, discount rules and support. Every plan starts with a fourteen-day free trial with no card. **Does SlickCell support the VAT margin scheme for used phones?** Yes. Tax is a rule you configure, and margin is one of the rule types, scoped to used stock. Each device carries its own purchase cost, so the margin on every sale is worked out from that unit, and margin-taxed sales are reported separately from standard-rated ones. **Can I run more than one shop?** Yes, from one login, on the Professional plan and above. Each branch keeps its own stock and its own staff, the owner adds branches from the main shop, and every branch can be read together on one dashboard and in the reports. Each extra branch is £39 a month, excluding VAT. **Does it handle staff as well as repairs?** Yes. Every employee has a profile with shifts, attendance and leave, including staff who never sign in. Hours are priced at the pay rate in effect on the day and produce a payslip, which you hand to your payroll provider or accountant for tax and filing. Roles decide what each person can see and do. --- ## For suppliers Source: https://slickcell.com/for/suppliers #### Mobile phone wholesaler software for parts and electronics suppliers Software for parts distributors and wholesalers. SlickCell is mobile phone wholesaler software for businesses that supply repair shops and electronics retailers. The shops you supply raise the order in their own SlickCell account, and it arrives in yours as an order: not an email to re-key, not a PDF someone reconciles later. #### One morning, start to finish - Twenty past eight. An order lands from a shop you supply, ten screens and six charging flexes, carrying their own purchase order number. You have the screens. You have four of the flexes. So the quote goes back saying four, not six, and the shortfall is a number on the order rather than a phone call at five o'clock. - They approve it before ten, which holds the stock against that order instead of leaving it on the shelf to be sold twice. It goes out on the afternoon courier, and confirming the dispatch is the moment it leaves your inventory. - One screen arrives marked. They book it in as damaged, you authorise the return, and the credit is on their statement before the week is out. ##### How an order moves between a repair shop and a wholesaler Eight steps, and the only two that belong to the shop are the two that should: approving the quote, and saying what turned up. - **It arrives**: Their purchase order lands as your incoming order, their PO number on it. - **Match the lines**: To your own stock, or offer an alternative, a special order, or nothing. - **Quote**: Confirm, re-price, or supply four where six were asked for. - **They approve**: All of it, or some lines and not others: their decision, recorded. - **Reserve**: Approved stock is held against that order rather than sold twice. - **Dispatch**: Confirming the dispatch is the moment stock leaves your inventory. - **They book in**: Line by line: accepted, damaged, missing or wrong item. - **Settle**: They submit a payment; you verify it; the statement moves. Nothing in that sequence is transcribed. What they ordered and what you read are one record, and what you sent and what they booked in are checked against it rather than against anybody's memory. ##### The screen that decides what a buyer sees Not a claim about the supplier side. One of its screens, photographed, with the rule printed on it. ##### What a buyer is shown The sharing panel that decides it: exact stock, availability only, or nothing at all. Below it, the line that says cost prices, margins, internal notes and reorder levels are never shared, in any mode. Beside it, the customers with access and the wholesale price on each shared item. ##### Fewer phone calls, and an argument you can settle What a wholesaler notices in the first month of running an order this way. - **One order, not two records**: Their purchase order and your sales order are the same document, so nothing is keyed twice and nothing drifts. - **A short line is a number**: Supplying four of six is quoted on the order rather than explained on the phone, and it stays visible afterwards. - **Stock that leaves once**: Approved lines are reserved, and inventory only moves when you confirm the dispatch. - **A shortage with a paper trail**: What arrived damaged or missing is booked in against what you sent, so the credit is agreed from a record. - **A balance that means one thing**: A payment is a claim until it is verified, and a claim never quietly reduces what is owed. ##### Wholesale point of sale software, and the supplier side on top Your trade counter runs on the same till, stock and invoices as the orders from connected shops. ##### Incoming orders A shop's purchase order arrives as your order, their reference on it. ##### A shared catalogue Wholesale price, minimum order quantity and lead time, per item. ##### Control what is seen Exact stock, availability only, or nothing. Cost and margin never. ##### Versioned quotes Re-price or offer an alternative; every version keeps its reason. ##### Reserve on approval Approved lines are held against that order rather than sold twice. ##### Dispatch Delivery, courier, collection or third party: stock moves on confirm. ##### Receipt, line by line They book in what arrived: accepted, damaged, missing or wrong. ##### Discrepancies that end Replace, authorise a return or issue credit; the shop confirms it closed. ##### Payment verification A payment is a claim until you verify it. Pending moves no balance. ##### Customer statements Invoiced, outstanding and overdue per shop, with terms and a limit. ##### A thread per order One conversation in one place, with notes only your staff can see. ##### Business customers Pause new orders, decline with a reason, or archive once nothing is open. #### Every shop you introduce is worth a month of what they pay Not a share of it, and not a fraction of your own bill. A shop that signs up through your link and pays for Professional earns you £59 against your next invoice. | | One shop | Three shops | Ten shops | |---|---|---|---| | Starter, £39 a month | £39 | £117 | £390 | | Professional, £59 a month | £59 | £177 | £590 | | Supplier Pro, £99 a month | £99 | £297 | £990 | | Enterprise, priced individually | £99 | £297 | £990 | ##### How you earn one, and how you spend it The four that matter most. There are 13 in total, and the rest are on the programme page. - **Share your link, or tell us the name**: Your link and its QR code are in the app under Settings → Referrals, and a shop that signs up through either is matched to you automatically. If you would rather tell us who to expect, the form still works and a person still reads it. Both mechanisms earn the same. - **It counts once they are paying**: The fourteen-day trial does not count. A shop earns you their first month's plan price the first time they actually pay for a plan, and nothing before that. - **Fourteen days before it is yours**: A reward is held for fourteen days after the shop's first payment. If that payment is refunded inside those fourteen days you earn nothing, because the shop never really paid. It is a holding period, not a delay in applying it. - **It comes off your next bill**: Credit is added to your SlickCell account and the next invoice takes as much of it as it is worth, carrying the rest to the one after. It covers whatever that invoice covers, additional locations included. It does not expire and it is not paid out in cash. ##### Wholesale software: what suppliers ask first Straight answers to what wholesalers ask before they sign up. **Do I have to be a repair shop to use this?** No. You choose “supplier” as your business type when you set the account up, and the supplier side is switched on for you. What you should know is that there is no separate distributor product: you get the whole platform (stock, a counter, invoices, customers and reporting) with Supplier Operations on top of it. For most wholesalers that is useful rather than surplus, because a trade counter is still a counter. **Is SlickCell a wholesale POS system?** Yes. A supplier account is the whole SlickCell platform, with a till for your trade counter, stock, invoices, customers and reports, plus Supplier Operations: incoming orders from connected shops, versioned quotes, stock reserved on approval, dispatch, and statements for each business customer with terms and a credit limit. **Do my customers have to be on the same system?** For the connected order, yes. The whole point is that their purchase order and your sales order are one record, and that only works when both businesses are on it. Everyone else is still an ordinary customer with ordinary invoices. You are not locked out of trading with them, you just re-key their orders the way you do now. **Can I order parts from my supplier inside SlickCell?** Yes, when your supplier is connected. Your purchase order lands in the supplier's own account, they confirm or re-quote and dispatch, and you book in what actually arrived without retyping it. **What do buyers actually see of my prices and stock?** You decide, per catalogue. Quantity can show as an exact figure, as availability only, or not at all. Prices are the wholesale price you set per item, and an item left without one shows as price on application. Cost prices, margins, internal notes and reorder levels are never shared, in any mode. **How do I get listed so shops can find me?** Two steps, and the second one catches people out. First you apply from your settings, which is where the trading details, categories and delivery terms go. Once that is approved you still have to publish your public profile (a description, at least one supplier type, at least one category and a fulfilment method) and until you do, you are approved but not listed. **What control do I have over who orders from me?** Shops already on the platform can add you as their supplier and start ordering straight away, so new trade reaches you with no approval queue. You control everything from there: you can turn new orders off, decline an order with a reason they see, set credit terms and a limit per customer, or archive the relationship once nothing is outstanding. **What happens when a delivery is short or damaged?** They book the delivery in line by line (accepted, damaged, missing or the wrong item) and raise a discrepancy against the lines that were not right. You accept it, accept part of it, or reject it with a reason. Then you send a replacement, authorise a return, or issue a credit, and the shop confirms it is settled before it closes. **How does the money side work?** The order becomes an invoice, and when a shop pays it they submit the payment against it. That submission is a claim until you verify it, and an unverified claim never reduces the balance you are owed. Each business customer has a statement showing what has been invoiced, what has been verified, what is outstanding and what is overdue, against the terms and credit limit you set for them. **What does it cost?** Supplier Operations is part of the Supplier Pro plan rather than an extra you bolt on, so one price covers the platform and the supplier side together. The trial runs fourteen days on that plan with every feature available and no card, which is long enough to take a real order from a real customer before you decide. **Is the partner programme worth anything if I can only introduce two or three shops?** Yes. One shop is worth something on its own: £39 if they pay for Starter, £59 for Professional, £99 for Supplier Pro. Two or three is a month you largely do not pay for, so the arithmetic starts working at two or three rather than at thirty. What it will not do is pay you, the reward only ever cancels your own bill. The plan prices it follows are on the pricing page. **How many shops can I introduce?** As many as you like, and there is no ceiling on what you can earn. Credit that is worth more than your next bill is not lost, the invoice takes what it is worth and the rest waits for the one after. Because a shop earns once rather than every month, bringing more is the only way to keep earning, which is exactly the way round we want it. **Is there a referral link or somewhere to see what I have earned?** Both, in the app under Settings → Referrals: your link, a QR code for it, who has arrived through it and what each one is worth. A shop that signs up through the link is matched to you without anybody doing anything. If you would rather tell us a name than share a link, the form still works and a person still reads it. **What if the shop I introduce cancels?** If they cancel, the reward is still yours, it is earned on their first paid month and it is for bringing them, not for keeping them. What does come back is a REFUND: inside the first fourteen days you earn nothing, because the payment did not stand, and after that we take back the same share that was refunded and no more. **When does the credit actually come off a bill?** The earning is automatic, the link matches them, their first payment qualifies it, fourteen days pass and the reward is yours. Moving it onto your account is done by a person here, and then your next invoice takes it automatically. If you are close to a bill and want it on that one, say so and we will make sure it is applied first. **Do the shops I introduce have to keep buying from me?** No. The reward follows their subscription, not their orders. If a shop you introduced starts buying from another wholesaler as well, or instead, what you earned is still yours. They are still a customer here and you are still the reason. We would rather not be in the business of policing who you trade with. --- # Guides, in full ## VAT on second hand goods: what a shop owes Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/vat-on-second-hand-goods VAT on second hand goods for UK shops: when the full price is taxed, when only the margin is, and the records that decide which. Sourced to gov.uk. VAT on second hand goods is due when a VAT-registered shop sells them. The question is not whether, but on how much: the whole selling price, or only the difference between what you paid and what you sold for. That second option is the [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices), and whether a used phone, tablet, laptop or console can go through it depends on how you bought it. ### Is there VAT on second-hand goods? Yes, if you are VAT registered. By default VAT is charged on the full selling price at the standard rate, which is 20% ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-rates)). The alternative is a margin scheme. It taxes "the difference between what you paid for an item and what you sold it for, rather than the full selling price", at 16.67%, one sixth of that difference ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). Second-hand goods are one of the things it covers, and GOV.UK defines them as "goods that can still be used, or which could be used after repair" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). ### When only the margin is taxed Two conditions decide it for a shop selling used devices: you were not charged VAT when you bought the item, and you keep the records the scheme requires. If you do not meet all of its requirements, VAT is due on the full selling price of each item ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). The whole checklist is in [when does the margin scheme apply](/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply). ### Second-hand items bought from a VAT-registered supplier A margin scheme cannot be used for "any item you bought for which you were charged VAT" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). So a used laptop bought from the public can go through the scheme, and the same laptop bought on a supplier invoice that showed VAT cannot: that one is sold with VAT on the full price, in the normal way. Where some of your stock is eligible and some is not, you charge VAT on the ineligible items in the normal way ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). ### A worked example Buy a used phone from a member of the public for £180 and sell it for £240. - Under the margin scheme: the margin is £60, and the VAT is £60 ÷ 6 = **£10.00**. - On the full price: the VAT inside £240 is £240 ÷ 6 = **£40.00**. Same phone, same sale, £30 apart. Put your own figures through the [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator), or see four cases worked in full in [how to calculate margin scheme VAT](/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat). ### What records decide it The scheme asks for a stockbook that tracks each item sold under it individually, and copies of the purchase and sales invoices for all of them ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). "Each item" is the point: the VAT on a sale depends on what that one device cost, so a shop has to know the cost of every unit, not of a model. ### Where SlickCell fits {perItem.body} [See how used-device stock is costed per unit](/features/used-devices). --- **General information, not tax advice.** Check the published guidance or speak to your accountant. Rules on this page were checked against the published guidance on 25 September 2026. --- ## Margin scheme VAT invoice: what it must show Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/margin-scheme-vat-invoice A margin scheme VAT invoice shows the total and never the VAT. What goes on it, what must stay off it, and an example for a used phone. Sourced to gov.uk. A margin scheme VAT invoice shows the total price and must not show VAT separately ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). That one line is where most shops go wrong, and it is the paperwork side of the [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices): the arithmetic can be right and the sale can still fall outside the scheme because the invoice said the wrong thing. GOV.UK is explicit that "the margin scheme invoice requirements are not the same as the general VAT invoice requirements" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). ### What a margin scheme invoice must not show The VAT. The total price goes on the invoice, and "you must not show VAT separately" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). The VAT you owe on the margin is worked out in your own records, not printed for the buyer. ### What goes on it When you sell an item under the scheme, the invoice you give the buyer must include ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)): - the date; - your name, address and VAT registration number; - the buyer's name and address, or that of their business; - the item's unique stockbook number; - the invoice number; - a description of the item; - the total price, with no VAT shown separately; - one of the scheme statements, which for used devices is "margin scheme - second hand goods". ### Margin scheme invoice example A used phone sold for £240 that cost the shop £180: | On the invoice | In the shop's stockbook | |---|---| | Date, invoice number, your details and VAT number | Stock number, date of purchase, purchase price £180 | | Buyer's name and address | Name of seller, description of the item | | "Used smartphone, stock number 1042" | Date of sale, sales invoice number | | Total: £240.00 | Margin: £60.00 · VAT due: £10.00 | | "Margin scheme - second hand goods" | | The £10.00 lives in the right-hand column only. The stockbook fields are the ones GOV.UK lists for each item bought and sold ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). The figures are worked in [how to calculate margin scheme VAT](/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat), or put your own through the [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator). ### Why the till gets this wrong A till set to print a VAT breakdown on every receipt will print one on a margin-scheme sale too, and that document is then wrong. It is worth looking at what your receipt actually says on a used-device sale rather than assuming. ### Buying records: the other half The scheme also needs an invoice from the seller for every item you buy. It includes the date, the seller's and your names and addresses, a description of the item and the total price, "you must not add any other costs to this price"; where you bought from another VAT-registered business it also carries the item's stockbook number and the scheme statement ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). Which items qualify at all is in [when does the margin scheme apply](/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply). ### Where SlickCell fits {perItem.body} [See how used-device stock is costed per unit](/features/used-devices). --- **General information, not tax advice.** Check the published guidance or speak to your accountant. Rules on this page were checked against the published guidance on 25 September 2026. --- ## How to calculate margin scheme VAT: 4 examples Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat How to calculate margin scheme VAT, with four worked examples for used devices: a normal sale, a repaired unit, a loss and a VAT-paid purchase. How to calculate margin scheme VAT, in one line: take the selling price, subtract what you paid for that item, and the VAT is one sixth of the difference ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). This post works that through for four cases a repair or phone shop meets every week. The [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices) guide explains the rules behind it, and the [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator) does the sum for your own figures. ### The formula - **Margin** = selling price − purchase price of that item - **VAT** = margin ÷ 6 Why one sixth? The standard rate of VAT is 20% ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-rates)), and 20% is added to a price without VAT. The margin already has the VAT inside it, and the VAT inside a VAT-inclusive amount is 20/120 of it, which is one sixth. GOV.UK states the result as "16.67% (one-sixth) on the difference" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). ### Example 1: a used phone bought from the public Bought for £180, sold for £240. - Margin: £240 − £180 = £60 - VAT: £60 ÷ 6 = **£10.00** - Kept after VAT: £50.00 ### Example 2: you repaired it before selling The same phone needed a £40 screen before it could be sold. The screen does not go into the margin: you cannot include repairs, parts or accessories in margin calculations, and you reclaim the VAT on them on your VAT return in the normal way instead ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). - Margin: still £60 - VAT: still **£10.00** - What you keep: £50.00 − £40.00 = £10.00 ### Example 3: sold for less than you paid A laptop bought for £300 sells for £260. There is no difference to tax, so there is no VAT due on that sale: the scheme taxes "the difference between what you paid for an item and what you sold it for" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)), and here there is none. One caveat. The clearest statement of the loss rule was in a notice that was withdrawn on 23 December 2021. The result above follows from the definition, but check with your accountant before relying on it. ### Example 4: bought with VAT on the invoice A tablet bought from a trade supplier whose invoice showed VAT cannot go through the margin scheme at all: it cannot be used for "any item you bought for which you were charged VAT" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). You sell it with VAT on the full price in the normal way. Sold for £240, the VAT inside that price is £240 ÷ 6 = £40.00. Which items qualify is set out in [when does the margin scheme apply](/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply). ### Is 20% margin the same as 25% markup? Yes, and that is arithmetic rather than a tax rule. Margin is profit as a share of the selling price; markup is profit as a share of the cost. A £20 profit on an £80 cost is a 25% markup and, on the £100 selling price, a 20% margin. ### Where the numbers go The invoice for a margin sale shows the total only, and the VAT stays in your records: see [what a margin scheme VAT invoice must show](/blog/margin-scheme-vat-invoice). ### Where SlickCell fits {perItem.body} [See how used-device stock is costed per unit](/features/used-devices). --- **General information, not tax advice.** Check the published guidance or speak to your accountant. Rules on this page were checked against the published guidance on 25 September 2026. --- ## Is there VAT on refurbished phones? (UK shops) Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/vat-on-refurbished-phones Is there VAT on refurbished phones? For a VAT-registered shop, yes: on the full price or only the margin, depending on how the phone was bought. Sourced. Is there VAT on refurbished phones? Yes, if your shop is VAT registered. Whether it is charged on the whole price or only on your margin depends on how you bought the phone, not on whether you refurbished it ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). The rules behind that are the [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices), and this post applies them to the phones a shop buys, fixes and sells. ### Do you pay VAT on second-hand phones? There are two cases. - **Bought from a member of the public, with no VAT shown.** The phone can go through the margin scheme, which taxes the difference between what you paid and what you sold it for, at one sixth of that difference ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). - **Bought on an invoice that showed VAT.** The margin scheme cannot be used for "any item you bought for which you were charged VAT" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). You sell it with VAT on the full price, in the normal way. ### Does refurbishing change the VAT? Not the VAT on the phone. Repairs, parts and accessories cannot be included in margin calculations, and the VAT you were charged on them is reclaimed on your VAT return in the normal way instead ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). A new screen changes what you keep, not the margin the VAT is worked out on. A phone that needs work still counts: GOV.UK defines second-hand goods as "goods that can still be used, or which could be used after repair" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). ### Refurbished phones bought from a trade supplier If a supplier sold you a refurbished phone on an invoice that showed VAT, the margin scheme does not apply to that phone ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). If it came from another VAT-registered business under the margin scheme, the purchase invoice carries its stockbook number and the words "margin scheme - second hand goods" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). What each invoice must say is in [what a margin scheme VAT invoice must show](/blog/margin-scheme-vat-invoice). ### Tablets, laptops and consoles The same rules apply to any second-hand goods the scheme covers ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)), so a used tablet, laptop, games console or smartwatch is treated the way a used phone is. The wider picture for every kind of stock is in [VAT on second hand goods](/blog/vat-on-second-hand-goods). ### What it looks like on one phone Bought for £180, a £40 screen fitted, sold for £240: the margin is £60, the VAT is £10.00, and you keep £10.00 after the screen. Example 2 in [how to calculate margin scheme VAT](/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat) works it through, and the [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator) takes your own figures. Whether a given phone qualifies at all is the checklist in [when does the margin scheme apply](/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply). ### Where SlickCell fits {perItem.body} [See how used-device stock is costed per unit](/features/used-devices). --- **General information, not tax advice.** Check the published guidance or speak to your accountant. Rules on this page were checked against the published guidance on 25 September 2026. --- ## When does the margin scheme apply? A check Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply When does the margin scheme apply to a second-hand item? The conditions from gov.uk as a checklist a shop can run on each device before it sells. When does the margin scheme apply? To eligible second-hand goods that you were not charged VAT on when you bought them, sold with the records the scheme requires ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). Miss a condition and VAT is due on the full selling price of that item instead. The [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices) guide explains how the scheme works; this post turns its conditions into a check a shop can run on each phone, tablet, laptop or console as it arrives. ### The checklist - **The item is second-hand goods.** "Goods that can still be used, or which could be used after repair" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). - **You were not charged VAT when you bought it.** A margin scheme cannot be used for "any item you bought for which you were charged VAT" ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). - **Repairs and parts stay out of the margin.** Business overheads, repairs, parts and accessories cannot be included in the calculation ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). - **It is in your stockbook, on its own line.** A stockbook that tracks each item individually, with copies of the purchase and sales invoices ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). - **The sales invoice shows no VAT.** The total price, with no VAT shown separately ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). You do not have to register to use the scheme: you start by keeping the correct records and reporting it on your VAT return ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). ### Can I claim VAT back on a margin scheme item? Not on the item itself: you were not charged VAT on it, which is why it qualifies. The VAT you pay on repairs, parts and overheads is reclaimed on your VAT return in the normal way ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). ### What happens if a condition is not met You pay VAT on the full selling price of each item that does not meet all of the scheme's requirements ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). On a used phone sold for £240 that is £40.00 instead of the £10.00 the scheme would have charged on a £60 margin. The full workings are in [how to calculate margin scheme VAT](/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat), and the [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator) runs your own figures. ### On the VAT return Margin scheme sales go on your VAT return: box 1 includes the output tax due on eligible goods sold, box 6 the full selling price less the VAT due on the margin, and box 7 the full purchase price of eligible goods bought. Margin scheme purchases and sales do not go in boxes 8 and 9 ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/vat-return)). ### Recording the decision when the item arrives Whether a device qualifies is settled by how it was bought, so the moment to record it is when it comes in, not at the quarter end when nobody remembers which laptop came from the public and which from a supplier. The invoice side of the same decision is in [what a margin scheme VAT invoice must show](/blog/margin-scheme-vat-invoice), and the wider picture in [VAT on second hand goods](/blog/vat-on-second-hand-goods). ### Where SlickCell fits {perItem.body} [See how used-device stock is costed per unit](/features/used-devices). --- **General information, not tax advice.** Check the published guidance or speak to your accountant. Rules on this page were checked against the published guidance on 25 September 2026. --- ## How to start a phone repair business in the UK Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/how-to-start-a-phone-repair-business How to start a phone repair business in the UK: what to repair, where to trade, Companies House and HMRC, parts, pricing and first customers. Starting a phone repair business in the UK takes less money than opening most shops, and more decisions than most people expect. This guide on how to start a phone repair business takes them in the order they arrive: what you will repair, where you will do it, how to set the business up, where parts come from, how to price a repair, how to find your first customers and how to keep track of every device that comes through the door. Each legal step links to the GOV.UK page that explains it, because that is the source that counts, and none of this is legal or tax advice. It is written by SlickCell, which makes repair shop software, so the software section near the end is ours; everything before it applies whatever you use. If you also repair tablets, laptops or games consoles, almost all of it still applies. (In the US the same question is usually asked as how to open a cell phone repair store; the business steps below are the UK ones.) ### Decide what you will repair Phones only, or phones plus tablets, laptops, consoles and smartwatches? The answer sets almost everything that follows: the tools on your bench, the parts you stock, the skills you need and who walks through the door. Most people start narrow. Screens, batteries and charging ports on the phones you see most often are the bulk of counter work, and they are the repairs you can learn, stock and price with confidence. Board-level work, water damage and data recovery are separate skills; add them when you have the time to learn them properly, or send those jobs to a specialist and keep the customer. Widening later is easier than narrowing. A shop that says it fixes everything and then turns jobs away loses more trust than one that says exactly what it does. ### Home, market stall, kiosk or shop Each has a different trade-off between cost, footfall and trust. - **From home.** The cheapest start, and the one where customers have to trust you most, because they are handing over a device full of their life to a front door. Think about where customers' devices are kept overnight. - **A market stall or kiosk.** Footfall without a full shop's rent, but little bench space and nowhere secure to leave work in progress. - **A shop.** The most trust and the most cost: rent, rates, a counter, a secure place for devices and room to grow into selling accessories and used phones. If you plan to work from home, GOV.UK says you may need permission from your mortgage provider or landlord, or from your local council if you will have lots of customers or want to advertise outside, and that home insurance may not cover your business, including stock and customers visiting ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/run-business-from-home)). You may also have to pay business rates on the part of your home you use for the business ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/run-business-from-home)). ### Set up the business Most businesses register as a sole trader or a limited company, and the structure you choose affects how you pay tax and your legal responsibilities ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/set-up-business)). **Sole trader.** The simplest structure to set up and keep records for. You can start trading straight away, but you must register for Self Assessment if you earn more than £1,000 in a tax year, and you are personally responsible for all of the business's debts ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/set-up-sole-trader)). You can trade under your own name or a trading name. **Limited company.** A company is legally separate from the people who own it, and you register it with Companies House before you start trading. Directors must keep company and accounting records and file accounts and tax returns, and the company pays Corporation Tax on its profits ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/limited-company-formation)). There are rules to follow when choosing a company name. GOV.UK notes it is usually easier to move from sole trader to limited company than the other way ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/set-up-business)), so many repair shops start as sole traders and incorporate later. An accountant can tell you which suits your numbers. ### VAT: when you have to register You must register for VAT if your total taxable turnover for the last 12 months goes over £90,000, or you expect it to go over £90,000 in the next 30 days. You can choose to register below that ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-registration)). If you will buy used phones from the public and sell them on, read about the [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices) before your first sale: it decides whether you pay VAT on the whole selling price or only on your margin. The [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator) shows the difference on your own figures. ### Customer data and devices A repair shop holds names, phone numbers and email addresses, and the devices themselves are full of personal data. GOV.UK says you must follow the data protection rules if your business stores or uses personal information, keep it secure, accurate and up to date, and tell the Information Commissioner's Office (ICO) how your business uses personal information ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/data-protection-your-business)). Most businesses that process personal data pay the ICO a data protection fee, which for most small businesses is £52 or £78 a year, unless they are exempt ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/data-protection-register-notify-ico-personal-data)). Insurance is a question to ask an insurer, not a box GOV.UK ticks for you: public liability, and cover for customers' devices while they are in your care, are both worth asking about before the first device is left with you. ### Old parts and batteries Dead screens, swapped-out batteries and broken boards pile up faster than you expect. Waste from a business is business waste, and you must store it safely, use a registered waste carrier and complete a waste transfer note for each load that leaves your premises; there are extra responsibilities for hazardous waste ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/managing-your-waste-an-overview)). Read that page before the first box fills up. If you sell new electrical items, such as chargers, headphones or phones, you must also give customers a free way to dispose of their old household electrical equipment when they buy a new version of the same item ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/electricalwaste-producer-supplier-responsibilities)). ### Tools and a bench What you need to start, before any parts: - precision screwdrivers for the fastenings on the devices you repair; - spudgers, opening picks and suction cups; - a heat mat or heat gun, and a screen separator if you do glass or screen work; - an anti-static mat and wrist strap; - magnification: a lamp, a loupe or a microscope as your work gets finer; - a bench power supply for testing; - a parts organiser, so a screw from one phone never ends up in another. Buy for the repairs you decided to do first, not for every repair there is. ### Where UK repair shops buy parts Most shops buy from trade parts suppliers and wholesalers. Before you order, ask each one for a trade account, how returns work on faulty parts, and how they grade screens, because two screens for the same phone can differ a great deal in quality and price. Order small at first, test what arrives, and keep the suppliers whose faulty-part returns are straightforward. ### How to price a repair A repair price covers three things: the part, your time, and an allowance for the parts that fail or come back. Work out each one per repair type: 1. what the part costs you, delivered; 2. how long the job takes you, honestly, at the hourly rate you need to earn; 3. a margin for comebacks and the occasional part that fails on the bench. Then quote before you start work, and write down what the customer agreed. A quote that is written down and approved is the difference between a repair and an argument at collection. ### Is a phone repair business profitable? It can be, and the only way to know whether yours is, is to measure it. Profit is set by four things: what parts cost you, how long each job takes, how often work comes back, and what the premises cost. For the first three months, record each job's parts cost against its price, and how many jobs come back. By the end of the quarter you will know which repairs pay and which only keep you busy. ### Your first customers - **Google Business Profile.** Set it up with your opening hours and the repairs you do; it is where local searches land. - **A sign that says what you fix.** "Phone and tablet repairs, screens and batteries while you wait" says more than a logo. - **Local groups and noticeboards.** Answer questions where people ask them. - **Other shops.** A phone shop that does not repair may send you its repairs. Ask happy customers for a review, honestly, and never in exchange for anything. ### Keep a record of every device from day one From the first repair, keep one record per job: the device with its IMEI or serial number, the fault, its condition when it came in, the quote, any deposit and what was paid. Keep stock the same way, one record per device you buy to sell, with its own cost, and it is ready when the VAT margin scheme needs it. {unit.body} {money.body} {margin.body} SlickCell does this in one system from {entryPrice} a month, with a 14-day trial you start yourself and no card. If you are comparing options, see [what free repair shop software really costs](/free-repair-shop-software), the [best repair shop software in the UK compared](/compare/best-repair-shop-software-uk), or [SlickCell pricing](/pricing). ### Questions people ask before they start #### Can I start a phone repair business from home? Yes, many do. GOV.UK says you may need permission from your mortgage provider or landlord, or your local council in some cases, and that home insurance may not cover your business ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/run-business-from-home)). Check those, and decide where customers' devices will be kept overnight. #### Do I need to register for VAT? Only once your taxable turnover for the last 12 months goes over £90,000, or you expect it to in the next 30 days; you can choose to register below that ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-registration)). If you sell used phones, the [VAT margin scheme](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices) changes what you owe on them. #### What tools do I need to start? Precision screwdrivers, spudgers and opening picks, a heat mat or heat gun, an anti-static mat and strap, magnification, a bench power supply and a parts organiser, bought for the repairs you plan to do first. #### What software do phone repair shops use? Most run repair shop software that holds the repair ticket, the till and the stock together, with devices tracked by IMEI or serial. See the [best repair shop software in the UK compared](/compare/best-repair-shop-software-uk). --- **General information, not legal or tax advice.** Check the published guidance or speak to an accountant. Figures and rules on this page (the £1,000 Self Assessment limit, the £90,000 VAT threshold and the ICO fee) were checked against GOV.UK on 25 September 2026. --- ## “Where is my phone?” The call you can stop taking Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/where-is-my-phone The commonest question a repair shop is asked has the same answer every time, and a person has to find it first. It does not have to be a person. Count them one Saturday. Not the enquiries, not the bookings, just the calls that are somebody asking whether their device is ready yet. In most shops it is between five and fifteen. Each one costs about ninety seconds, because the person answering has to find the ticket before they can say anything, and they are usually holding a screwdriver when the phone rings. Twenty minutes a day, spent giving out information you already have. ### The call is not the problem It is tempting to treat this as an interruption to be blocked. It is not. The customer is asking a completely reasonable question about their own property, and they are asking it because there is no other way to find out. The problem is that the only interface to that information is a human being. And a human being is slow, occasionally wrong, and busy. ### What "ready" actually means to them Three different questions arrive as the same phone call: - **Is it done?** They want to know whether to drive over. - **Is it still going to be today?** They need the phone for something. - **Has something gone wrong?** It has been longer than they expected, and silence is starting to feel like bad news. The third one is the expensive one. Silence is where a perfectly ordinary two-day repair turns into a complaint, because nothing told them that "waiting for a part" is a normal state rather than a problem. ### A link, not a portal The instinct is to build a customer account system. Resist it. Accounts mean sign-ups, passwords, password resets, and a support burden that dwarfs the phone calls you were trying to avoid: for customers who will use it once. What actually works is much smaller: a link that is specific to one repair, handed over on the paperwork the customer is already holding. No account. No password. No app. A code on the receipt, a phone camera, and a page that says where that job has got to. ### What belongs on that page This is the part worth thinking about carefully, because a link anyone can open is a decision about disclosure. **Put on it:** the stage the repair has reached, the device, roughly when it is due, and who is working on it. That is what the customer would be told on the phone, so there is nothing new being given away. **Leave off it:** money and full identity. The price is between you and the person who authorised the work, and it does not belong on a page reachable by anyone holding the receipt: including whoever finds it on a train. **Make it forgettable to search engines.** An unlisted page is not a published one. Anything of this kind should tell crawlers to stay away, and you should be able to give a link an end date or switch it off. ### The stages have to be honest A status page that only ever says "in progress" is worse than no status page, because it teaches the customer that checking is pointless and they go back to ringing. The stages that earn their place are the ones that mean something different to the customer: - **Booked in**: we have it, we have not started. - **Being worked on**: someone has it open. - **Waiting for a part**: this is why it is taking longer, and it is not forgotten. - **Sent away**: a specialist has it. Same reassurance. - **Ready**: come and get it. That third one is the whole return on the exercise. "Waiting for a part" is the single most common cause of a repair taking longer than quoted, and it is the one thing a customer cannot guess. ### Then ask, while it is fresh The other thing a link like this is good for is the review, and the timing is the entire trick. Asking a week later, by email, when the job is a blur and the email is in a promotions folder, gets you nothing. Asking at the moment the repair is finished (from the same link they already have open, from the phone in their hand) is a different proposition entirely. Two rules make it worth doing. Only ask once the job is actually finished; and attach the answer to the technician who did the work, so a run of five-star jobs is attributable rather than being a fact about the shop in general. ### The test Pick your busiest day and ask one question: if a customer wanted to know where their device was at nine in the evening, could they find out? If the answer is "they'd have to ring in the morning", the twenty minutes is still being spent. You just have not noticed it, because it is spread across the whole day in ninety-second pieces. --- How this works in SlickCell (the QR on the ticket, the status page, the invoice link and the review) is on [Customer tracking](/features/customer-tracking). --- ## Ordering from a supplier who is already in the system Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/ordering-from-a-connected-supplier Every purchase order gets typed twice: once by you, once by them. Everything that goes wrong afterwards starts with that second typing. Here is a purchase order's actual life in most repair shops. You work out what you need. You write it in an email, or a WhatsApp message, or into a portal that belongs to your supplier and looks like it was built in 2011. Somebody at the other end reads it and types it into their own system. They reply with what they can do and what it costs. You read that and type it back into yours. Two people, typing the same list, into two systems that will never speak to each other again. ### Everything downstream inherits that Once the same order exists in two places, every later question becomes an archaeology exercise. The box arrives short. Short against what? Your sent folder, or their picking note? The price on the invoice is not the price you remember. Remember from where, the email or the reply to the email? A part goes back and a credit is agreed. Agreed by whom, and against which order? None of these are dramatic. Each is £30 or £60 and twenty minutes. They are invisible because there is no single record either party can point at, so nobody can be shown to be wrong and nothing gets fixed. ### The fix is not a better email It is that the order is one record with two viewers. You raise a purchase order in your own system, off your own stock levels. It arrives in the supplier's system as an incoming order. Not a PDF of your order. Not a notification prompting them to go and type it. The order. From there, the interesting parts are the ones that used to be conversations: **They can only supply some of it.** They send back a quotation with the lines they can do, at the prices they can do them. You approve line by line. What you did not approve is cancelled rather than assumed. **The price has changed.** The re-quote is a new version of the same document, with a reason attached. You see that the price moved and why, before it turns up on a bill. **They offer an alternative.** A different part, as a line-level suggestion you accept or decline: not a substitution that appears in the box and gets discovered on a Tuesday. ### Reserving is not sending This is the part most systems get wrong, and it is worth being fussy about. When a supplier approves your order, the stock should be **reserved**: held against your order, not available to be sold to the next shop that rings. But it has not left their building yet, so it should not have left their stock figures either. Those are two different events, and collapsing them into one is how a supplier ends up selling the same four screens twice. Reserve on approval. Deduct on dispatch. If a system cannot tell you which of those has happened, its stock figure is a guess. ### Receiving is where the money is The box arrives, and this is the moment worth thirty seconds of somebody's time. Book in what actually turned up, line by line, and let the outcomes be different from each other: accepted, damaged, missing, wrong item. Only the accepted goods should reach the shelf. Everything else should open something (a discrepancy, a return, a credit expected) rather than being absorbed into a shrug. A process with only "received" and "not received" cannot record thirty-six against an order of forty. So it records forty, and the four are gone. ### Paying, and being believed The last unglamorous piece: you pay, and the supplier's statement still says you owe it. The honest model is that a payment you record is a **claim** until the other side confirms it. Not because anyone is lying, but because two ledgers take time to agree and it is useful for both parties to see which items are agreed and which are still in flight. A claim awaiting confirmation should never quietly reduce a confirmed balance. That is how one side ends up arguing from a number the other has never seen. ### Is it realistic? Only if your supplier is on the same system, and today most will not be. That is worth saying plainly rather than pretending otherwise. But the parts that do not depend on them are worth doing anyway. Raise real purchase orders. Receive against them, per line, with real outcomes. Keep bills matched to receipts. All of that works with a supplier who has never heard of your software, and it is where most of the leaked money is. The connected version is what happens when the supplier is on it too. Then the second typing, the one every later problem descends from, simply does not happen. --- How this works in SlickCell, from the shared catalogue to the payment confirmation, is on [Supplier network](/features/supplier-network). The supplier-agnostic half is on [Purchase orders & receiving](/features/procurement). --- ## Your staff already carry a barcode scanner Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/staff-already-carry-a-scanner The second till never gets a scanner, because a scanner is eighty pounds you have not spent. Everyone behind the counter is already holding one. Most repair shops own exactly one barcode scanner, and it lives at whichever till used it last. That is not a purchasing failure. A scanner is never urgent enough to buy today and never cheap enough to buy four of, so the shop settles into a rhythm: one counter scans, the other types SKUs, and the stock delivery on the floor is counted by carrying boxes to the desk the cable reaches. Meanwhile there are four phones behind the counter, each with a camera better than the scanner. ### Why "just use the phone" usually is not that simple Plenty of people have had this idea. The reason it does not normally work is not the camera (phone cameras decode barcodes perfectly well). It is everything around it. To scan into a sale, the phone has to know which sale. Which means it has to be signed in as somebody. Which means an app, an account for every member of staff, a password nobody remembers, and a device you now have to think about when someone leaves. At which point the £80 scanner looks like the cheap option, because it is. ### Pairing beats logging in The move that makes it work is to stop treating the phone as a user and start treating it as a peripheral. A peripheral does not log in. It gets connected to one till, for one session, and it stops being connected when the session ends. That is what a cable does, and it turns out you can do the same thing with a code on a screen. The till shows a QR. A phone scans it. That phone is now attached to that till's open sale, and to nothing else. No account was created and nothing was installed. Four properties make that safe, and they are worth checking on any implementation: **The code expires.** A pairing code left on a screen at lunchtime should be useless by the time someone finds it. Minutes, not hours. **The session expires too.** Separately, and on a hard ceiling. A phone forgotten in an apron pocket must stop being a till after a while whatever it is doing. **One code, one phone.** A pairing code that can be claimed twice is a pairing code that can be photographed. **The till can cut it off.** Disconnect, and finishing the sale, should both end it immediately. ### What the phone should be allowed to do This is where it is worth being precise, because the whole value of the idea is that you can hand the phone to whoever is standing there: the Saturday assistant, the new starter, the person helping out during a rush. **Let it scan, change a quantity, and remove a line.** That is what a second pair of hands actually needs. **Do not let it price or take money.** Discounting, overriding a price and taking payment are decisions with a role attached, and that role belongs to whoever is on the till, not whoever is holding a phone. And be honest about what it displays. A phone scanning into a sale *shows the sale*: the lines, the prices, the total. It has to; the person holding it is reading items out. The meaningful question is not whether it shows prices, it is what it never receives at all: what those items cost you, your margin, who supplies them, the customer's name and number, and complete serial numbers. Those are the things you would not want written down on a bus, and none of them need to leave the till for a barcode to be scanned. ### The cases it actually solves Not "replacing scanners". These: - **The second counter**, which has never had one and never will. - **The delivery on the floor**, which is nowhere near the desk. - **The busy Saturday**, where an extra person is worth more than an extra till. - **The pop-up or the market stall**, where the hardware is whatever fits in a bag. If your shop has one counter and a scanner already cabled to it, this changes nothing for you, and that is fine. Keep the scanner. A good USB scanner is fast, dumb and reliable, and any system worth using should accept one. They behave like keyboards, so it is not much of an ask. ### The thing to check before you rely on it Signal. A phone that loses the till mid-sale must say so and stop, not quietly collect scans nothing will ever read. Ask what happens on a dropped connection: the honest answer is that scans are numbered and acknowledged, so reconnecting catches up on exactly what was missed. The dishonest answer is silence, and you will find out on the busiest afternoon of the year. --- How pairing, expiry and the split of authority work in SlickCell is on [Phone scanner](/features/mobile-scanning). --- ## Who is allowed to give a discount? Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/who-can-give-a-discount Most shops answer that question with trust. Trust is not a control, and the difference shows up in the month's margin, not on the day it happens. Ask a shop owner who is allowed to give a discount and you usually get a name. Ask who is allowed to void a sale, refund a card payment, change a price after it was agreed, or see what a screen cost you, and the answer is normally the same name, followed by "well, everyone can, really, but they wouldn't." That is not a permission model. It is a hope, and it holds right up until a Saturday when the person you trust is on lunch. ### The problem is not theft It is worth saying plainly, because the conversation usually starts in the wrong place. The reason to control who can discount is not that your staff are stealing from you. In most shops they are not. The reason is that **an unrecorded decision cannot be reviewed**. If anyone can knock £15 off, then at the end of the month you have a margin that is lower than your pricing says it should be and no way to find out why. The individual decisions were probably all reasonable. Collectively they are invisible, and invisible is the part that costs you. ### Four actions worth separating Most of the damage comes from four actions that are usually bundled together because they all live near the till: - **Discounting.** Reducing the price of something before it is paid for. - **Voiding.** Removing a sale that has already been rung up. - **Refunding.** Sending money back out after it has come in. - **Seeing cost.** Knowing what you paid for the thing on the shelf. They are different risks with different answers. A Saturday assistant probably should be able to take a payment and probably should not be able to refund one. A technician needs to order a part and does not need to know its margin. Your accountant needs every figure in the building and should never be able to issue a refund. Once you write them out like that, the bundle stops looking sensible. Nobody actually wants one switch labelled "trusted". They just never had four. ### "Hidden" is not the same as "not allowed" Here is the part that catches a lot of systems out, and it is worth checking on whatever you use today. There is a difference between a button that is not shown and an action that is not permitted. If the rule lives only in the screen, then the rule is decoration: it holds for the person clicking, and it does not hold for anything that reaches the data another way. The test is simple enough to ask a vendor. *Where is the permission enforced: in the interface, or in the database?* If the answer is only the first, then what you have is a tidier screen, not a control. The same question applies to figures rather than actions. Hiding a cost column is not the same as a role that cannot read cost at all. One is a layout choice. The other is a boundary. ### Roles are how you stop over-granting The practical failure in small shops is not too few permissions. It is that handing someone a login feels risky, so the owner keeps their own account logged in at the counter, and everyone uses it. That single habit destroys every audit trail you have. "Who authorised this refund" has one answer for the whole shop and it is you. Six months later, when you actually need to know, there is nothing to find. Giving everyone their own login is only safe if a login can be *limited*. That is the whole argument for roles: not bureaucracy, but the thing that makes individual accounts affordable. Once a sales role genuinely cannot refund, you can hand out sales accounts freely, and the audit trail starts naming people instead of naming you. ### What to look for If you are assessing this on a system you already run, or one you are considering, four questions get you most of the way: 1. Can two people on the same till have different powers, without one of them sharing the other's password? 2. Is discounting separable from refunding, and refunding from voiding? 3. Can someone be allowed to *use* an item without being allowed to *see what it cost*? 4. When something is overridden anyway, because sometimes it has to be, does the system record who allowed it and why, or does the exception just happen? The fourth is the one people forget. A control that cannot be overridden gets worked around, and a workaround leaves no record at all. The goal is not to make the exception impossible. It is to make it visible. ### In practice Every shop overrides its own rules sometimes. A regular customer, a job that went badly, a goodwill discount at the counter: these are good decisions and they should stay possible. What should not stay possible is making them anonymously. If you can answer "who discounted this, and why" three months later, the system is doing its job. If you cannot, then the £15 was never really the problem. --- In SlickCell this is five roles (owner, manager, technician, sales and accountant) enforced by database policy rather than by hiding buttons, with cost visibility handled as a separate decision from the actions themselves. [Workforce and roles](/features/workforce) covers how they are assigned, and [Security](/security) covers where they are enforced. --- ## Counting stock without closing the shop Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/counting-stock-without-closing A stocktake fails for boring reasons: it takes a day you don't have, and the till keeps selling while you count. Both are solvable. Most repair shops know their stock figure is wrong. They also know roughly when it went wrong: around the time somebody took a screen off the shelf for a job and meant to write it down. The reason it stays wrong is not laziness. It is that a stocktake, as most shops imagine it, means closing on a Sunday, counting everything, and typing numbers into a spreadsheet that is out of date by Tuesday. Nobody has a spare Sunday, so the figure drifts for another year. ### What actually makes a count hard Three things, and only one of them is the counting: **You are racing the till.** If you count the accessory wall at 10am and sell two cases at 11am, your count is wrong by the time you enter it, but you have no way to know whether the difference is a sale or a discrepancy. So the whole count becomes untrustworthy, and an untrustworthy count is worse than none, because you will act on it. **It is all or nothing.** A count that must cover the entire shop can only ever happen when the entire shop is closed. That is why it never happens. **Nothing separates the finding from the fixing.** In a spreadsheet, correcting the figure and discovering the variance are the same keystroke. So the variance (the actually interesting bit, the thing that tells you where stock is going) is destroyed at the moment it is found. ### Snapshot, count, approve, apply The fix is to make those four things four separate steps rather than one. **Snapshot.** When the count opens, the system records what it currently believes is on the shelf, right then. That number is frozen. Everything you count is compared against the snapshot, not against a figure that keeps moving, so the two cases you sell at 11am are a known movement rather than a mystery variance. You are no longer racing the till. **Count.** Enter what is physically there, line by line. Lines you have not reached should stay *unreached*, not zero. This sounds obvious and is the single most common way a count destroys good data: an empty box treated as "none in stock" will happily write off a shelf you simply did not get to. **Approve.** The variances appear: short, over, and what the difference costs. Nothing has changed yet. This is the step that is usually missing, and it is the one that makes a count useful: a manager looks at a list of differences and asks why, *before* the numbers are overwritten. **Apply.** Only now does stock actually move, and each correction posts as its own movement with a reason attached. Next month, "why did we write off four screens in August" has an answer. ### Count a shelf, not a shop Once a count can be scoped, the Sunday problem disappears. Count the accessory wall on a quiet Tuesday. Count one supplier's parts the week their statement arrives. Count the used handsets monthly, because that is where the money is, and the cases twice a year, because it is not. A small count you actually do beats a full count you keep postponing. It also narrows the investigation: when twelve lines are out, you can go and find out why. When four hundred lines are out, you shrug and accept the number. ### The variance is the point It is tempting to treat a stocktake as an accounting chore. Get the number right, move on. But the corrected number is the least valuable thing it produces. The valuable thing is the pattern. Screens short and cases fine means something different from everything short by a bit. A line that is over means something was booked in twice or a return went back on the shelf without a record. Repeated shortages on one category, month after month, is a process problem with a location, and you now know where to look. That pattern only exists if variances are recorded as variances. If the count silently overwrites the figure, you have bought yourself a correct number today and learned nothing. ### The practical minimum If you do nothing else: - Count one category a month rather than the shop once a year. - Freeze what you are comparing against before you start. - Leave uncounted lines uncounted. - Have someone other than the counter approve the differences. - Keep the variance, not just the correction. None of that needs a closed shop. It needs about forty minutes and a decision to stop treating the stock figure as something that will sort itself out. --- How a scoped count works in SlickCell (snapshot on open, submit, manager approval, then apply) is written up step by step in [Run a stocktake](/help/run-a-stocktake). The wider model, where devices are tracked one unit at a time and parts by quantity, is on [Inventory & device units](/features/inventory). --- ## VAT margin scheme for used devices: how it works Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices A SlickCell guide to the VAT margin scheme on used phones, laptops and consoles: one sixth of the margin, a worked example, the records needed. The VAT margin scheme lets a VAT-registered business pay VAT on the difference between what it paid for a second-hand item and what it sold it for, rather than on the full selling price. For a shop that buys used phones, laptops, tablets and games consoles from the public, it is usually the difference between a £10 VAT bill and a £40 one. Buy a used phone from a member of the public for £180 and sell it for £240, and you do not owe VAT on £240. You owe it on the £60 margin, and not even 20% of that: one sixth, which is £10.00. That is the whole scheme in two sentences. Almost every part of it has a condition attached, and this guide goes through each one with HMRC's own wording and the same worked numbers. ### What is the VAT margin scheme? HMRC's description is short: VAT margin schemes "tax the difference between what you paid for an item and what you sold it for, rather than the full selling price. You pay VAT at 16.67% (one-sixth) on the difference." ([HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)) So on that phone: - Margin: £240 − £180 = **£60** - VAT: £60 ÷ 6 = **£10.00** - Yours: **£50.00** Without the scheme, VAT on the full £240 selling price would be £40.00. That gap is why the scheme exists: you bought the phone from someone who was not VAT registered, so there was no VAT to reclaim on the way in, and charging VAT on the entire sale price would tax value that was never yours. ### Which goods qualify: phones, laptops, consoles and other second-hand electronics The scheme covers second-hand goods, works of art, antiques and collectors' items. HMRC defines second-hand goods as "goods that can still be used, or which could be used after repair" ([HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)), which takes in every used phone, laptop, tablet, games console and smartwatch a shop buys to sell on, whether it works yet or needs a repair first. A used device bought from a member of the public is the ordinary case. What rules an item out is how you bought it, not what it is: if you were charged VAT on the purchase, the scheme does not apply to that item (mistake 1 below). [Is there VAT on refurbished phones?](/blog/vat-on-refurbished-phones) works through the phone a shop buys, fixes and sells. ### How to calculate VAT under the margin scheme This is the single most common error, and it always goes the same way: the shop overpays. The standard rate of UK VAT is 20% ([GOV.UK VAT rates](https://www.gov.uk/vat-rates)). But 20% is what you add to a price that does not yet include VAT. The margin is not that kind of number. The £60 is money that has already come out of a customer's pocket, so the VAT is already inside it. To pull VAT out of a VAT-inclusive amount you take one sixth, because 20/120 = 1/6: | | 20% of the margin | One sixth of the margin | |---|---|---| | £60 margin | £12.00 | **£10.00** | | £150 margin | £30.00 | **£25.00** | | £400 margin | £80.00 | **£66.67** | At a £60 margin that is £2.00 overpaid on every sale. Forty sales a month is £960 a year that nobody asked you to pay. You can put your own figures through the [VAT margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator), which shows the working rather than just the answer, or see four cases worked in full in [how to calculate margin scheme VAT](/blog/how-to-calculate-margin-scheme-vat). ### Is there VAT on second-hand goods? Yes, if the seller is VAT-registered, but under the margin scheme only on the margin. A private seller charges no VAT at all; a VAT-registered shop selling a second-hand device either pays one sixth of its margin under the scheme or charges VAT on the full price in the normal way. More on that in [VAT on second hand goods](/blog/vat-on-second-hand-goods). ### Four VAT margin scheme mistakes that cost shops the scheme The arithmetic is easy. The conditions are where the money goes. #### 1. You were charged VAT when you bought it If the item came to you on an invoice showing a separate VAT amount, it is not eligible for the margin scheme. You reclaim that VAT as input tax and sell the item under normal VAT rules instead. In practice this is the line between the two halves of a lot of shops' stock: devices bought from the public go through the margin scheme, and stock bought from a VAT-registered trade supplier generally does not. They cannot be treated the same way, which means the decision has to be recorded per item at the point it arrives: not reconstructed at quarter end. The whole check is in [when does the margin scheme apply](/blog/when-does-the-margin-scheme-apply). #### 2. You added the repair cost to the purchase price This is the one that catches repair shops specifically, because it feels obviously fair. You paid £180 for the phone, then £40 on a screen to make it sellable. Surely your cost is £220? For the margin scheme, no. HMRC is explicit that you cannot include business overheads, repairs, or parts and accessories in margin calculations ([HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/eligibility)). The margin is still £60, and the VAT is still £10.00. The VAT on that screen comes back to you a different way, covered under claiming VAT back below. It does change what you keep, of course: £50.00 of margin after VAT, minus £40 of parts, is £10.00 in your pocket. Which is worth knowing before you price the next one. #### 3. Your invoice showed the VAT A margin scheme sales invoice shows the total price and **must not show VAT separately** ([HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). This is a paperwork rule with a real cost attached, and tills cause it. A system configured to print a VAT breakdown on every receipt will happily print one on a margin-scheme sale, and that document is then wrong. It is worth actually looking at what your receipts say on a used-device sale rather than assuming. What the invoice must carry is in [what a margin scheme VAT invoice must show](/blog/margin-scheme-vat-invoice). #### 4. Your records will not support it The scheme requires a stockbook that tracks each item sold under it individually, plus copies of purchase and sales invoices for all of them ([HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). "Individually" is the important word. This is a per-item scheme: the VAT on a sale depends on what *that specific device* cost you. Four iPhone 13s bought at four different prices, or three identical laptops bought at three prices, are that many different margins, and a single line in a spreadsheet reading "iPhone 13 ×4" cannot tell you any of them. If the requirements are not met, VAT is due on the full selling price of each item rather than the margin ([HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes)). That is the £40 outcome instead of the £10 one: not a penalty, just the scheme not applying. ### What happens when you sell at a loss Sometimes a device does not move and you take what you can get. If you sell it for less than you paid, there is no margin, so there is nothing to tax on that sale. What you cannot do is set that loss against the margin on a different item. Under the standard margin scheme each sale stands on its own. A separate arrangement called global accounting works differently and pools the figures, but it is a different scheme with its own conditions: not something you drift into by accident. One honest caveat on this section: the clearest statement of the loss rule appeared in a notice that was withdrawn on 23 December 2021. It follows from the definition anyway, a sale at or below cost produces no difference to tax, but we would rather flag that than quote a withdrawn notice at you as though it were current guidance. ### Can you claim VAT back under the margin scheme? Not on the item itself: no VAT was charged when you bought it, so there is nothing to reclaim. Where you were charged VAT on parts or repairs to make that item sellable, you reclaim it on your VAT return in the normal way. The relief comes back to you through a different door, not by shrinking the margin. ### Keeping a margin scheme record for every device None of the above is difficult on one sale. Anyone can do £240 − £180 ÷ 6. It gets hard because the margin scheme is per item, and a shop is not. Stock arrives from three or four different routes, some of it eligible and some not. Devices sit for weeks. Somebody takes a trade-in on a Saturday. By the time the return is due, the question "what did this specific phone cost us?" needs an answer for every device that left the shop that quarter, and if the answer lives in someone's memory, or in a quantity count that says "iPhone 13 ×4", it is not really an answer. That is the actual work: keeping a cost against every individual device from the day it arrives to the day it leaves. How a shop does that (spreadsheet, stockbook, or software) matters less than that it does it at all. In SlickCell this is how stock already works. > **{margin.q}** {margin.a} [See how used-device stock is costed per unit](/features/used-devices). --- **General information, not tax advice.** Check [HMRC guidance on GOV.UK](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes) or speak to your accountant about your circumstances. Figures and rules on this page were checked against the published guidance on 24 September 2026. --- ## Why stock by IMEI or serial beats a quantity count Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/imei-level-stock Tracking each handset as its own record changes what you can see, sell and trust on the shelf, and it is the only way per-item margin VAT ever adds up. A box of screen protectors is a number. You have eleven, you sell one, you have ten. Nothing about the eleventh is different from the third. A second-hand handset is not a number. It has a cost, a condition, a battery health, and a history, and the one at the back of the drawer cost you £40 more than the one at the front. Counting both the same way is where the trouble starts. ### What "iPhone 13 ×4" cannot tell you Say the shelf shows four of the same model. You bought them over six weeks: one trade-in at £150, two from a supplier at £205 each, one from a walk-in at £180. The count says 4. It is even correct. But it cannot answer: - Which one did we just sell? - What did *that* one cost us, so what did we actually make? - Which of these came in on a VAT invoice and which did not? - Which is the one with the swollen battery the customer brought back? Each of those questions has a real answer. The count has thrown all of them away, and the only place they still exist is in somebody's memory. ### The moment it stops being an inventory problem Most shops can live with a fuzzy count. What they cannot live with is a fuzzy margin. The VAT margin scheme is a per-item scheme: the VAT you owe on a used handset depends on what *that specific handset* cost you, not on an average. Four handsets bought at four different prices are four different margins and four different VAT figures, and the record-keeping rules ask for a stockbook that tracks each item sold under the scheme individually ([official guidance](https://www.gov.uk/vat-margin-schemes/keeping-records)). A line reading "iPhone 13 ×4" cannot produce any of that. Which means the choice between a quantity count and unit-level records is not really an inventory preference: it decides whether your VAT return is built on records or on recollection. There is more on the arithmetic in [getting the VAT margin scheme right on used devices](/blog/vat-margin-scheme-used-devices), and you can put figures through the [margin calculator](/tools/vat-margin-calculator). ### What a unit-level record actually holds One physical handset, one record, carrying: - An identifier: an IMEI, a serial number, or your own shop reference - What you paid for it, and what you are asking - Storage, colour, condition, battery health - Where it came from - What happened to it: received, reserved, sold, returned The count then stops being something anyone types. Available stock is however many unit records are still available, which means it cannot drift away from the shelf. There is no separate number to fall out of step. ### "That sounds like more work" It is one extra field when a handset arrives. That is the honest cost. What it removes is the work you are already doing and not counting: reconciling a count that drifted, reconstructing what something cost at quarter end, arguing about which handset the customer actually bought, and discovering in April that the margin you have been quoting yourself all year was an average of four different purchase prices. You are already tracking these devices individually. The IMEI or serial number is written on the box, or in a notebook, or in a WhatsApp message to your supplier. Unit-level stock just puts it where the money is. ### A note on identifiers It does not have to be a full IMEI or serial number. The last few digits, or an internal shop reference all work as long as one record means one physical device, and no two records share a reference. Perfect data entry is not the condition: one-to-one is. --- Practical detail on how this works in SlickCell is on the [inventory and device units page](/features/inventory). --- ## Purchase orders, receiving, and the gap in between Source: https://slickcell.com/blog/purchase-orders-and-receiving Why booking stock in against the order you raised is what stops a short delivery quietly becoming your problem, and your loss. You order forty screens. A box turns up. Somebody opens it, puts the screens on the shelf, and gets back to the counter. Six weeks later the supplier's statement says you owe for forty. You are fairly sure there were thirty-six. Nobody counted, the box is long gone, and the conversation you are about to have is one you cannot win. ### The gap The order is a record. The bill is a record. The bit in the middle, what actually arrived, usually is not. That gap is where money leaves a repair shop quietly: - A short delivery nobody noticed, paid for in full - A price on the invoice that is not the price you agreed - Two boxes booked in once, or one box booked in twice - A part on the shelf that no order accounts for - A credit you were promised that never arrived and nobody chased None of these are dramatic. Each is £30 or £60. It is the fact that they are invisible that makes them add up. ### Receiving is the control, not the admin The fix is not a better filing system. It is that goods get booked in **against the order that created them**, at the moment they arrive. That single act does several things at once. It tells you what was actually delivered, as opposed to what was ordered. It leaves a partial receipt open rather than closed, so a short delivery stays visible instead of being forgotten. It gives the eventual supplier bill something to be checked against. And it puts the stock on the shelf and in the system in the same movement, so the count does not depend on somebody remembering to adjust it afterwards. The order stops being a piece of paper you raised and becomes something with a state: sent, partly received, received, billed. ### Partial deliveries are normal The most useful thing a receiving process can do is treat a partial delivery as an ordinary event rather than an exception. Suppliers back-order. Boxes get split. If your process only has "received" and "not received", a delivery of thirty-six against an order of forty has nowhere to go, so it gets marked received, and the four vanish. Recording thirty-six against a forty-line order leaves four outstanding, and outstanding things can be chased. ### Then the bill has something to argue with When the invoice arrives, the question is no longer "does this look about right?" It is whether this bill matches what we received, at the price we agreed. That is a question with an answer, and it is the difference between checking a supplier statement and accepting one. ### What it costs to do properly Ordering is a two-minute job. Receiving is a two-minute job. Neither is hard; both get skipped on a busy Saturday, and the cost of skipping them does not show up until the statement lands. The practical test for any shop: if a delivery arrived short this morning, would anyone know by Friday? If the honest answer is no, the gap is open. --- How purchase orders and receiving work in SlickCell is on [Purchase orders & receiving](/features/procurement). Everything above works against your own supplier records, whether or not the supplier uses SlickCell Pro. When they do, the order stops being an email, [Supplier network](/features/supplier-network). --- # Help centre, in full ## Add a device to stock Source: https://slickcell.com/help/add-a-device-unit-by-imei By the end of this the device is on the shelf as its own row, sellable by IMEI or serial number, with a cost that will show up correctly in profit when it sells. 1. **Find or create the model**: Inventory → Items. If you already stock that model, open it; if not, add it as a device. The model holds the name and the default price; the units hold everything that varies. 2. **Add the unit**: Enter the IMEI or serial, the condition, the storage and colour, what you paid and what you are asking. Anything else the shop records (battery health, network, whether it is boxed) goes on the unit too. (The reference is free text. A full IMEI, a serial, the last five digits or your own sticker number are all fine; nothing is rejected for the wrong shape.) 3. **Check the model's quantity**: It has gone up by one, because it counts the units. There is no number to correct. **Two devices with the same IMEI or serial number** Not possible, and that is the point: one reference is one physical device. **I do not know the IMEI or serial number yet** Use a shop reference for now and correct it later. An unlabelled device on a shelf is the thing this is meant to prevent. --- ## Answer an order from a shop Source: https://slickcell.com/help/answer-an-incoming-order By the end of this an order that arrived from a shop has every line answered: matched to something you hold, offered as an alternative, put on special order, or marked unavailable. An order carries three statuses at once, and they move independently. The order status is where the conversation has got to, fulfilment is where the goods are, and payment is where the money is. 1. **Open the order**: Supplier Operations → Orders. The list shows your reference, the shop's own purchase order number, who sent it, when it arrived and when they need it. Open one to work on it. 2. **Read the three statuses**: The header carries Order, Fulfilment and Payment as separate badges, and a fourth for a discrepancy if there is one. They are separate because they genuinely move apart: an approved order can still be sourcing, and a delivered one can still be unpaid. 3. **Answer each line**: Match the line to an item in your own inventory, or use one of the other four answers: offer an alternative product, put it on special order, ask the shop for details, or mark it unavailable. A line that came from your catalogue is already matched. (A line the shop typed themselves arrives as a new item request rather than a catalogue line. Matching it is how it becomes something you can price and reserve.) 4. **Check the quantity ladder**: Every line shows seven stages (requested, quoted, approved, reserved, dispatched, delivered, accepted) and each is its own figure. If you can supply four of the six asked for, the quoted quantity is four and the requested quantity stays six, so the shortfall stays visible instead of disappearing into an edit. **I can only supply part of a line** Quote the quantity you can supply. The requested figure is kept beside it, so the shop can see what is short and decide whether to approve the line anyway, and you both still have the record afterwards. **They have asked for something I do not stock** Offer an alternative and pick the product you would send instead, or put the line on special order if you can get it. Either way the shop sees what you are proposing before they approve. **Who on my team can do this?** Owners, managers and sales staff can work orders. Preparing and sending a quotation is limited to owners and managers. --- ## Set your account up as a supplier Source: https://slickcell.com/help/become-a-supplier By the end of this you have a supplier account that shops can find, connect to and order from. There are two gates rather than one. The Supplier Operations module needs the plan that carries it AND an approved supplier profile, having only one of the two shows you a wall rather than the module. 1. **Sign up and choose your business type**: Sign up as anyone would, then on the first onboarding step choose supplier rather than repair shop. That choice decides which plans you are shown, a supplier is shown Supplier Pro, because it is the plan that carries Supplier Operations. (If you arrive from the supplier page on our website, the business type and the plan are already set for you.) 2. **Open the supplier application**: Settings → Supplier Account. You will need to be the owner or a manager; other roles can see the page but not submit it. 3. **Fill in who you are and what you supply**: Legal and trading name, registration and tax numbers, address and contact. Then what kind of supplier you are, the categories you carry, how you deliver, the areas you cover, your minimum order and your fulfilment time. Returns and warranty policy go here too. (You can save it as a draft and come back. Nothing is submitted until you say so.) 4. **Submit, and wait a little**: Submitting puts the application under review. Approval usually completes within about half an hour and you get a notification when it does, the Supplier Operations module appears in your sidebar at that point. 5. **Publish your public profile**: Supplier Account → Public Profile. This is the step that catches people out: approval does not put you in the directory. You need a description, at least one supplier type, at least one category and a fulfilment method, and then Publish. (Publishing is refused, with the missing field named, until all four are there. Hide it again at any time and you drop out of the directory without losing anything.) **I am approved but no shop can find me** Your profile is almost certainly still a draft. Go to Supplier Account → Public Profile and publish it. Only published profiles appear in the directory that shops search. **Do I have to be a repair shop as well?** No. You get the whole platform (stock, a counter, invoices, customers and reporting) with the supplier side on top, and you can use as much or as little of it as suits you. **Can somebody else on my team apply?** Only the owner or a manager can submit the application or change supplier settings afterwards. Sales staff can work the orders once you are live. --- ## Book a repair in Source: https://slickcell.com/help/book-a-repair-in By the end of this a ticket exists with the customer, the device and the fault on it, a price, any deposit already recorded against the job, and a printed slip with a tracking code the customer can use. You need a customer in front of you (or on the phone) and the device's details. Nothing else has to exist first. A new customer can be added inside the same flow. 1. **Open Repairs and choose New ticket**: The ticket is built in seven short steps down one panel. You can go back to any step before you create it. 2. **Customer**: Search by name, phone or email. If they are not there, add them here: name and a phone number is enough to carry on. 3. **Device**: Brand, model, colour and the IMEI or serial number. The IMEI or serial number is typed as it is: the app does not check its format, and if the customer knows the passcode you can record it so the technician is not stuck later. (Type a model the app has not seen and it offers to add it to your shop's list, so next time it is one click.) 4. **Issue**: Pick one or more faults from the list, or add your own wording. If the fault is not known yet, mark the ticket for diagnosis and set the price later. Priority and the promised time are set here too. 5. **Parts (optional)**: Search stock and add the parts you expect to use. They are committed to this ticket, so the shelf count is right before the technician starts. 6. **Price**: The agreed price, the labour, and the tax rate this job is charged at. What the customer will pay is shown before you go further. 7. **Deposit (optional)**: If the customer pays something now, record it here and how they paid. It sits against this job and comes off the bill at collection. You will not need to remember it. (Cash deposits need the counter open; the app tells you if it is not.) 8. **Technician (optional) and create**: Assign a technician now or leave it for the manager. Choose Create Repair Ticket. 9. **Print the ticket**: After creating, print the customer slip. It carries a code the customer can scan to see the repair's status without logging in. **The customer does not know the IMEI or serial number** Leave it blank or type the last few digits. It is free text and can be completed later from the ticket. **Two faults on one phone** One ticket. Pick both issues in the Issue step; they are priced together and the ticket stays one record. --- ## Set your country, currency and tax rate Source: https://slickcell.com/help/country-currency-and-tax You set these when you opened the shop, and they show up on every invoice, receipt and label. This is where to correct them. 1. **Open the shop settings**: Settings → General. Your name, address, contact details and country are all here. 2. **Change the country if it is wrong**: The currency follows the country. It sets the sign shown on every money figure in the app. It does not convert anything, so changing it does not restate your history. 3. **Say whether you are tax registered**: If you are, give the rate. A default tax rule is created from it and applies to sales and repairs. If you are not, no rule is created and nothing is added to your prices. (This is a fact about the business, not a preference. The app asks rather than guessing from whether a rate happens to be filled in.) --- ## Devices, parts and accessories are not the same thing Source: https://slickcell.com/help/devices-parts-and-accessories Your stock is three kinds of thing, and the app treats them differently on purpose. Getting this straight makes everything else about inventory obvious. 1. **Parts and accessories are counted**: A screen, a battery, a cable: you have eleven of them and they are interchangeable. One number, one cost, one price. 2. **Devices are individual**: Two second-hand iPhone 13s are not the same stock. One cost £215 and is in good condition; the other cost £180 and has a scratched back. Each is its own row with its own IMEI or serial number, cost, price and condition. 3. **A device model's quantity is counted, not typed**: Open a device product and the available figure is however many units are on the shelf. There is no quantity box, because there is nothing to type: add a unit and it goes up. (IMEI and serial are free text. A partial number, a shop reference, whatever you actually have is accepted; nothing is rejected for failing a format rule.) 4. **Selling works the same way**: An accessory goes on a sale by quantity. A handset goes on as the specific unit, priced from that unit, so the till cannot sell it at a price the shelf disagrees with. **Why can I not just set a stock number?** Because a number nobody can explain is worse than no number. Every quantity here has a movement behind it (a delivery, a sale, a repair, a stocktake) so you can always ask where it came from. --- ## Dispatch an order, and settle what follows Source: https://slickcell.com/help/dispatch-and-settle By the end of this the goods have gone, anything wrong with them has an ending, and the money against the order is either verified or visibly not. Confirming a dispatch is the moment stock leaves your inventory. Creating one does not. 1. **Create the dispatch inside the order**: Open the order and use its dispatch section. Everything is dispatched against an order rather than from a separate picking screen, so what you are sending is always tied to what was approved. (The section appears once the approved quotation has been converted to a sale. Before that there is nothing committed to send.) 2. **Choose how it goes, then confirm it**: Your own delivery, a courier, collection, or a third party. A courier asks for the carrier, the tracking number and link, the expected date and any shipping charge; a collection asks for where, when it is ready, a collection code and who is picking it up. Confirming is the step that matters: reserved stock leaves your inventory only when a dispatch is confirmed, and the shop is notified at that moment. (You can send part of an order now and the rest later. The section tracks what is still reserved and not yet dispatched.) 3. **Let them book it in**: The shop records what arrived, line by line: accepted, damaged, missing, the wrong item, or rejected. Only what they accept enters their stock, so a short or damaged delivery does not quietly become a full one. 4. **Deal with a discrepancy**: Anything they did not accept becomes a discrepancy with a typed reason and, usually, what they would like done about it. You accept it, accept part of it, or reject it, rejecting needs a reason, because a rejection without one is just silence. 5. **Verify the payment**: When the shop pays, the payment arrives as a submission rather than as money in the account. Verify it, or send it back as an amount mismatch, a duplicate, something you need to talk about, or a rejection. Until it is verified it does not reduce what they owe. (Verifying is limited to the owner, a manager or an accountant. Everyone else can see the queue but not act on it.) 6. **Read the customer's statement**: Supplier Operations → Accounts, then pick a business customer. You get what has been invoiced, what has been verified, what is outstanding, what is under discrepancy, what is overdue, and the credit limit and terms you set for them: over a ledger with a running balance. **They say they have paid and I cannot see it** Check the verification queue. A submitted payment sits there until somebody verifies it, and by design it does not move the balance while it waits, which is exactly the situation the queue exists to make visible. **Can I dispatch specific handsets?** Yes. Where a line is for devices tracked individually, the dispatch lets you choose which units go, by their IMEI or serial, rather than sending a quantity and working out later which ones left. **Can I archive a customer who owes me money?** No, and that is the point of the block. Archiving is refused while there are open orders, undelivered dispatches, unresolved discrepancies or an outstanding balance. Turn new orders off instead, and archive once it is clear. --- ## Hand the device back Source: https://slickcell.com/help/hand-a-device-over By the end of this the ticket is closed, the money is settled or explicitly not, and the warranty is running from today rather than from whenever the job was booked in. 1. **Get the job to completed**: A repair is finished when the work is done and tested. That is a separate step from the customer collecting it, because they usually are not the same day. 2. **Raise the invoice**: Generate invoice from the ticket. Any deposit already taken comes off it. 3. **Take the balance**: Whatever is left, by whatever method. The invoice settles as the payments land against it. 4. **Hand it over**: Handing over closes the ticket and starts the warranty from that moment. (Handing over an unpaid job is possible, but it asks for a reason and records who allowed it. That is the point: it should be a decision, not an accident.) **They are collecting it tomorrow** Leave it completed. Ready-to-collect is a real state, and the queue on the repairs screen counts it. **When does the warranty start?** At handover. If you change the length later, the expiry is recalculated from the same start date rather than from today. --- ## Invite staff and choose what they can do Source: https://slickcell.com/help/invite-staff-and-set-roles By the end of this the person has their own login, sees the parts of the app their job needs, and cannot reach the parts it does not. Roles are enforced on the server, not just hidden in the menu, so a role that cannot refund cannot refund, whatever it types. 1. **Open the team**: Settings → Team. Everyone with a login is listed here with their role. 2. **Send the invitation**: Their email and the role you want them to have. They get an invitation and choose to accept it, signing in does not join anyone to your shop on its own. 3. **Pick the right role**: Owner has everything. Manager runs the shop day to day, including voids and write-offs. Technician works tickets and stock. Sales runs the till and books repairs in. Accountant reads the money without changing it. (Refunds are open to the counter; voids and write-offs are not. That split is deliberate: a mistake at the till should be fixable without finding a manager, and a reversal of settled money should not.) 4. **Check the load**: Workforce shows who has what on the bench, so assigning a job is a decision rather than a guess. **Someone has left** Remove their access from the team. Their work stays on the records they did it on, a removed person does not erase a history. --- ## Jump to any screen with ⌘K Source: https://slickcell.com/help/jump-to-any-screen By the end of this you will be able to reach any screen in the app without touching the sidebar, and you will know what the four controls along the top of every page are for. One thing worth knowing up front: the palette finds screens and actions, not your records. Looking for a customer or a ticket number means going to that screen first. 1. **Press ⌘K**: Ctrl+K on Windows. The palette opens over whatever you are doing, and closes on Escape without changing anything. (There is a button for it in the header too, next to the shop name: the keyboard shortcut and the button open the same thing.) 2. **Type part of what you want**: “inv” finds Invoices, “stock” finds the stocktake and the stock movements, “tech” finds the technician views. Partial words are fine; you do not need the beginning of the name. 3. **Go deeper than a page**: Tabs and sections inside a page are in there too, so “faulty” goes straight to Inventory's faulty-items tab rather than to Inventory and then a hunt. 4. **Start something, not just visit it**: Some entries do rather than go: a new repair ticket, the barcode scanner. Enter starts them where you are. (You only see what your role allows. Nothing appears in the list that you would be refused after choosing it.) 5. **Use the dashboard for the ten common jobs**: The tiles under the header are the things a shop does all day: a repair, a sale, an invoice, a trade-in, a stocktake, a customer, an item, a lead, a manual money entry, a purchase order. **Can I search for a customer or a ticket number in it?** No. The palette finds screens, tabs and actions, not your records. To find a customer, open Customers and search there; for a repair, open Repairs. It is a way of getting somewhere fast, not a search of your data. **Can I scan a barcode into it?** Not into the palette. Scanning is its own thing: the scanner button in the header, or a paired phone at the till. **Can we change which quick actions appear?** Not from Settings. The set is fixed, and which of them you see follows your role: an accountant does not get New Repair, and only someone who can write to the cashbook gets the money-in-and-out tile. **Does the shortcut clash with the browser?** ⌘K and Ctrl+K are claimed by the app while you are on one of its pages. If you need the browser's own version, click into the address bar first. --- ## Read the profit and loss Source: https://slickcell.com/help/profit-and-loss-report The reports read from the same ledger the till writes to. There is no second set of numbers, which is why a total here can be opened to show the invoices behind it. 1. **Pick the period**: Reports, then Today, 7 days, 30 days, this month, or a range of your own. Everything on the page moves with it. 2. **Read revenue**: The total is what was invoiced in the period, split between counter sales and repairs. Those two add to the total, if they did not, something would be wrong. (Invoiced is not the same as received. Cash actually taken is in the Account tab, and the two differ by whatever is still owed.) 3. **Read the cost side**: Cost of goods comes from the stock movements the sales caused, at the cost those items were carrying when they sold. Labour comes from the payroll runs. 4. **Open a figure**: Any total opens onto the records it is made of. That is the check worth doing when a number looks wrong. It will show you which sale is behind it. **Revenue looks higher than what we banked** It will be, whenever anything is unpaid. Revenue is what you invoiced; the Account tab is what arrived. **Why does an old sale show a different cost from today's price?** Because it is recorded at the cost the item carried when it sold. Changing a price today does not rewrite last month's profit. --- ## Quote an order, revise it, and convert it Source: https://slickcell.com/help/quote-revise-and-convert By the end of this the shop has a priced quotation, you have their answer line by line, and the stock behind the approved lines is held against that order. Every version of a quote is kept. Nothing you send is overwritten by what you send next. 1. **Compose the quotation**: From the order, choose to prepare a quotation. It opens in your own till with the order's lines already in the basket, so you price it exactly the way you price anything else, discounts, tax and all. (That is why the quotation looks like a sale: it is being built by the same till, which is what keeps the eventual invoice consistent with the quote.) 2. **Send it**: Sending records it as a version and moves the order to awaiting the shop's approval. They see the priced lines, the quantities you can actually supply, and anything you have offered as an alternative. 3. **Read their answer line by line**: The shop answers per line rather than per quote. They can approve some lines and cancel others, so a quote is rarely a straight yes or no. Check which lines came back approved before you pick anything. 4. **Record an approval taken off the platform**: If they approved it by phone, by email or across the counter, record that instead of approving it yourself. You give the method, who approved it, when, and a note, and the record says the approval was entered by the supplier on the shop's behalf. (Use this only when the approval genuinely happened. It is audited, and it is labelled as recorded by you rather than given by them.) 5. **Revise, if it has to change**: A price moves, or a line you quoted is no longer there. Revising creates a new version, and because the shop has already seen the last one, the reason is required rather than optional. Both versions stay on the order. 6. **Convert it**: Converting the approved quotation turns it into a sale and reserves the stock behind the approved lines, so the same screens cannot be sold over the counter while this order is waiting to go out. **Can I change a quote without the shop knowing?** Not once they have seen it. A revision to a quotation the shop can already read requires a reason, and the previous version stays in the history beside it. **How long does a quotation stay open?** For the validity period set in your order defaults, after which a sent quotation lapses on its own. Supplier Account → Order Defaults is where that period lives, and it is worth checking rather than assuming. **Does reserving stock take it out of my inventory?** No. Reserving holds it against the order so it cannot be committed twice. Inventory only changes when you confirm the dispatch. --- ## Raise a purchase order Source: https://slickcell.com/help/raise-a-purchase-order By the end of this the order exists with its lines, its costs and its expected date, and the delivery can be booked in against it. You need a supplier on the system. Adding one takes a name. 1. **Open Purchase Orders and start a new one**: Inventory → Purchase Orders → New order. Pick the supplier first: it decides what you can order and at what price. 2. **Add the lines**: Search your own stock and add what you need. The cost comes from the item and can be changed on the line if this order is at a different price. (The cost is stored on the line as it is now. Changing the item's cost later does not rewrite what this order said.) 3. **Set the expected date**: Used to flag an order that is late, so a delivery that never arrived does not sit unnoticed. 4. **Save it, then send it**: A draft can be edited freely. Sending it fixes what you asked for, which is what the delivery is later checked against. **What should I order?** Inventory shows what is at or below its reorder level. That list is the honest starting point for an order. --- ## Read paid, due and change on an invoice Source: https://slickcell.com/help/read-paid-due-and-change-on-an-invoice An invoice shows what was charged, what has been paid and what is left. The last of those three is worked out from the first two. It is not a field, and nobody can edit it. That is the whole reason the totals on a report agree with the invoices underneath them. 1. **Open the invoice**: Sales → Invoices, then the invoice number. Repair invoices are also reachable from the ticket they belong to. 2. **Read the three figures**: Total is what was charged, including tax. Paid is the sum of the payments recorded against it. Balance is the difference. A partly paid invoice says so; a settled one says paid. 3. **Look at the payments**: Each payment shows its method, its reference and when it was taken. Two payments on one invoice is normal: a deposit and a balance, or a split at the till. 4. **Record another payment**: Take payment, then the amount and how it arrived. The balance updates because it is derived, not because anything was adjusted. (The app checks the balance you are settling against the one it holds. If someone else took a payment while you had the screen open, it refuses rather than double-counting.) 5. **Send it to the customer**: Print opens the document actions: the paper size, the address to email it to, and a link. The link is a copy the customer can read without an account: the same figures, from the same record, so there is no second version to keep in step. (Creating a link stops the previous one working. Give someone a new link and the old one they were sent goes dead, which is what you want when it went to the wrong address.) 6. **What they see**: The shop's details and tax numbers, each line with its quantity and tax, what has been paid and what is left. Nothing about cost or margin appears: the customer's copy carries what the customer is owed an account of, and no more. **Can I just change the balance?** No, and that is deliberate. If a customer is not going to pay the rest, write the balance off. That records a reason and shows up as a write-off rather than as money that was never owed. **Does a refund reopen the invoice?** No. A refund is its own record against the invoice. The invoice stays settled and the refund is visible beside it. --- ## Receive stock against a purchase order Source: https://slickcell.com/help/receive-stock-against-a-purchase-order By the end of this the stock is on the shelf, the order shows what actually turned up against what you asked for, and the supplier bill has been raised from the delivery rather than from the order. That last part is the point: bill from what arrived and a short delivery cannot quietly become your problem three weeks later. 1. **Open the order**: Inventory → Purchase Orders, then the order the delivery belongs to. The order opens on its lines, which is where a delivery is checked. 2. **Choose Receive**: Every line comes up with the quantity still outstanding filled in. That is the common case: the whole order arrived. 3. **Correct anything that is short**: Change the quantity on any line that came up short. Leave the rest. You are recording what is in front of you, not what the paperwork says. (Damaged units go in the damaged box rather than the received one. They are recorded but not stocked, so nobody sells them by accident.) 4. **Post the receipt**: Stock goes up by what you counted, each line gets a movement behind it, and the supplier bill is raised for the delivered quantity. 5. **Check the order afterwards**: An order that arrived in full reads Received. One that did not reads Partially Received, and the outstanding quantity stays on the line until the balance turns up or you close it short. **Two deliveries against one order** Receive twice. The second receipt picks up whatever is still outstanding, and the order closes when the last of it lands. **The supplier sent something we did not order** Receive what you ordered, and raise the extra as its own line or its own order. Booking it against a line it does not belong to makes the cost wrong on that part forever. --- ## Refund a sale, and say where the goods went Source: https://slickcell.com/help/refund-a-sale A refund is two facts, not one: money went back, and something happened to the goods. The app asks for both, because a shop that only records the first has a stock count that drifts every time something comes back. Refunds are limited to what was actually paid, and to lines that have not already been refunded. 1. **Open the invoice and choose Refund**: Sales → Invoices → the invoice, then Refund. You can refund one line or the lot. 2. **Pick the lines and the quantity**: Only what remains refundable can be chosen. A line already refunded once will not come up again. 3. **Say where each item went**: Back to stock as new, back as used, return to supplier, scrap, write off, or no return, when the customer keeps it. This is the step that keeps the shelf honest. (Anything sent to Faulty Items waits there rather than going straight back on sale, so a doubtful item is inspected before it is sold again.) 4. **Choose how the money goes back**: The refund is taken from the payments that settled the sale, so it cannot exceed what was actually received. **The customer paid cash but wants it back on a card** You choose the method the money leaves by. The refund still points at the original payment, so the trail holds. **What if nothing comes back?** Choose no return. The money goes back and the stock count is left alone, which is the truth of that situation. --- ## Deal with returned and faulty stock Source: https://slickcell.com/help/returns-and-faulty-items Something that comes back goes back on the shelf only if the person taking the refund chooses that. By default it waits in a holding area until somebody looks at it, which is the difference between a stock count you trust and one you do not. 1. **Find the holding area**: Inventory → Faulty Items. Everything a refund sent here is listed, with what it was and why it came back. 2. **Inspect it**: Record what condition it is actually in. That decides what can happen to it and, if it goes back on sale, what it is worth. 3. **Choose what happens**: Back to stock as new when it never left the box. Back as used when it did: it gets its own used listing rather than rejoining the new ones. To the supplier when it is their fault. Scrapped or written off when it is nobody's. (Used stock gets a separate listing on purpose. Mixing a returned item back in with new ones is how a shelf stops matching its own count.) 4. **Send the supplier ones back**: Anything marked for return to the supplier appears on the returns list with its reason, so a batch can go back together with a reference. --- ## Ring up a sale Source: https://slickcell.com/help/ring-up-a-sale By the end of this the sale exists as an invoice, the money is recorded against it, and the stock has come off the shelf, all as one event, so there is no state where the sale happened but the stock did not. You need the till open. If the counter is not open, the app says so before it lets you take cash. 1. **Open Sales**: The POS tab is the till. The cart starts empty with a walk-in customer attached. 2. **Add what they are buying**: Search by name, SKU or barcode and add it. An accessory goes on by quantity. A used handset goes on as a single unit: you pick the actual handset, and its price comes from that unit rather than from the model. (Scanning is quicker: the search box takes a barcode scanner, and a staff phone can act as one.) 3. **Attach the customer, if there is one**: A walk-in sale needs nobody. Search for a customer when you want the sale on their record, and you must, if they are not paying all of it today. (The app will not let you leave a sale part-paid against a walk-in. A balance owed by nobody is a balance nobody can chase.) 4. **Take the money**: Choose the method and the amount. To split it, add a second payment line, card for part, cash for the rest. The change due is worked out as you type. 5. **Complete the sale**: The invoice, the payments and the stock movement are written together. If anything fails, none of it is written and the cart is still there. 6. **Print or send the receipt**: Print to the thermal roll, or send it. The receipt carries a code the customer can scan to see the invoice again later. **Can I sell something that is out of stock?** Not a device unit. You are selling a specific handset, and a sold one is not available. For parts and accessories the app will warn you rather than stop you. **The customer wants to pay half now** Attach them to the sale first, then enter the part payment. The balance shows on their record and on the invoice. --- ## What each role can do Source: https://slickcell.com/help/roles-and-what-they-can-do Five roles, and the differences between them are about consequence rather than seniority. Anything that can quietly change money that was already settled is held back. 1. **Owner**: Everything, including billing, the plan and removing people. There is always at least one. 2. **Manager**: Runs the shop: tickets, stock, the till, reports, and the reversals, voids and write-offs that the counter cannot do. 3. **Technician**: Works the bench. Tickets, parts, stock and the repair side of the money. Can take a payment and issue a refund at the counter. 4. **Sales**: The counter. Rings up sales, books repairs in, takes payments and issues refunds. Does not void or write off. 5. **Accountant**: Reads the money (invoices, payments, reports, the cashbook) without being able to change any of it. (A read-only role is not a lesser one. It is the correct shape for someone whose job is to check the numbers rather than make them.) **Can I give one person a bit more?** Roles are fixed sets on purpose. A permission matrix that anyone can adjust becomes a permission matrix nobody can explain. --- ## Run a stocktake Source: https://slickcell.com/help/run-a-stocktake By the end of this the system's figures match the shelf, and every correction has a count behind it rather than someone having typed a new number. Nothing moves until the count is approved. A part-finished count is safe to leave. 1. **Start a count**: Inventory → Stocktake → New count. Choose what you are counting: everything, just the parts, just the accessories, one category, or one supplier's items. (The system's quantities are captured the moment you open the count. Sales during the count are handled; you are not racing the till.) 2. **Count the shelf**: Enter what is actually there, line by line. Leave anything you have not reached. It is not treated as zero. 3. **Submit the count**: The variances appear: short, over, and by how much, with the cost of the difference. Nothing has changed yet. 4. **Get it approved and applied**: A manager reviews the variances and approves. Applying the count is what moves stock, and each correction posts as its own movement so the reason is visible afterwards. **Something sold while we were counting** That is fine. The count is compared against the snapshot taken when it opened, and movements since then are accounted for rather than overwritten. **Can I count just one shelf?** Yes: scope the count to a category or a supplier. A full count of a busy shop is rarely the right first move. --- ## Share a catalogue, and decide what buyers see Source: https://slickcell.com/help/share-your-wholesale-catalogue By the end of this the shops you have granted access to can browse your items, see the price you set for them, and order against it without asking you for a list. Cost prices, margins, internal notes and reorder levels are never shared, in any mode. That is not a setting you have to get right. It is what the catalogue is allowed to contain. 1. **Turn the catalogue on**: Supplier Operations → Catalogue Sharing. Set the sharing mode: off, every active business customer, or only the ones you select. Off is the default, so nothing is shared until you decide it should be. 2. **Choose what quantity shows**: Quantity visibility is the setting above. If you pick availability only, set the low-stock threshold too. That is the figure at which an item starts reading as low rather than in stock. 3. **Price the items you want to sell**: In the shared items list, switch on the items you trade, and give each one a wholesale price, a minimum order quantity and a lead time in days. Leave the price blank and the item shows as price on application, which is the right answer for anything you quote per order. (Search your inventory to find items rather than scrolling: the list shows a page at a time.) 4. **Decide who gets in**: A shop asks for access and the request appears here. Approve it for your whole catalogue or for named categories, and set how long the access lasts. Access already granted is listed underneath, and you can revoke any of it, the shop is told either way. (You can also set access to approve automatically, in which case a request from a shop is granted the moment it is made.) **Can I show different prices to different customers?** Not today. Every buyer with access sees the same wholesale price you set on the item. Where a price genuinely depends on the customer or the order, leave it blank so the item reads as price on application and quote it on the order itself. **Will a buyer see what an item cost me?** No. Cost prices, margins, internal notes and reorder levels are never shared, in any mode. The buyer's view is built from a separate, restricted list of fields rather than from your inventory record. **What happens when access expires?** The shop stops being able to browse the catalogue. Anything already ordered is unaffected: an expiry ends browsing, not the relationship or its history. --- ## Start a free trial Source: https://slickcell.com/help/start-a-free-trial By the end of this you will have a shop of your own in the app, on a 14-day trial of the plan you picked, with the dashboard open. It takes a few minutes and nobody from us needs to be involved. You need an email address you can read straight away: the second step sends a code to it. 1. **Pick a plan on the pricing page**: Choose Starter, Professional or Supplier Pro and monthly or yearly, then use that plan's trial button. The choice travels with you and arrives already selected at step five. (Come straight to the sign-up page without choosing and the app recommends Professional for a repair shop. You can change it in step five either way.) 2. **Create your login**: Your name, email and a password. That is the whole form, no plan to re-pick and no card. 3. **Enter the code from your email**: A six-digit code arrives at the address you gave. Type it in, or paste it. If it has not arrived after a minute you can ask for another one. 4. **Set up the shop**: Step one: whether you are a repair shop or a supplier, the shop's name and address, the country, which sets the currency, and whether you charge tax and at what rate. Step two: your opening hours, used for due dates and the open/closed marker on the dashboard. (Close the tab halfway through and your answers are still there when you come back.) 5. **Confirm the plan and open the shop**: Step three shows the plans you can pick from with the one you chose already selected. Tick the terms and choose Launch. The trial starts on that plan; you are not asked for a card. 6. **You are on the dashboard**: The shop exists and is empty. The next things most owners do are bring stock in and book a first repair, both linked below. **Does the trial need a card?** No. The trial runs for 14 days on the plan you chose. When it ends you pick how to pay, or you stop. There is nothing to cancel. **Can I change the plan later?** Yes, from Settings → Billing. Every plan has every feature; they differ in team size, locations and discounts. **I am a supplier, not a repair shop** Choose Supplier in step one. You will see Supplier Pro as your plan. --- ## Take a deposit on a repair Source: https://slickcell.com/help/take-a-deposit A deposit is money against a job that has not been billed yet. Recording it here means nobody has to remember it at collection, the bill already knows. 1. **Take it at booking, or later**: The new-ticket panel has a payment step. On a ticket that already exists, Take payment does the same thing. 2. **Enter the amount and how they paid**: Cash needs the counter open; the app says so if it is not. 3. **Look at the balance**: The ticket shows the agreed price, what has been taken and what is left. That figure is worked out, not typed. 4. **Collect the rest at handover**: When the invoice is raised the deposit is already applied, so what is asked for at the counter is the balance and nothing else. **The job was cancelled after a deposit** Refund it from the ticket. It came in as a real payment, so it goes back as a real refund rather than being deleted. --- ## Set up tax the way your shop charges it Source: https://slickcell.com/help/tax-on-your-sales Your shop's default rate was set when you opened the account. Most shops need one or two rules beyond it, and this is where they go. A rule is a rate plus how it is applied, and it can be pointed at a category or a condition rather than at everything. 1. **Open the tax rules**: Settings → Tax rules, or Sales → Tax Rules. The default is the one already there. 2. **Understand the three treatments**: Exclusive adds tax on top of the price. Inclusive means the price already contains it. Margin means the tax is on the difference between what you paid and what you sold it for, not on the whole price. 3. **Scope a rule**: A rule can apply to a category, or to a condition: which is how used devices get treated differently from new stock without anyone remembering to switch anything at the till. (A line picks up the rule that fits it. Nobody has to choose the right tax on a sale.) 4. **Check it on a sale**: Put one of the affected items on a sale and look at the tax on the line. That is the fastest way to know a rule is doing what you meant. **We are not registered for tax** Then say so in Settings. No default rule is created, and nothing is added to your prices. --- ## Take a device in part-exchange Source: https://slickcell.com/help/trade-a-handset-in By the end of this you have bought a handset, paid the seller, and put it on the shelf at a cost you can prove, so when it sells, the profit on it is real. Buying a device is a purchase, not a note in the drawer. The record keeps the seller, the inspection and the money together. 1. **Start a trade-in**: Trade In from the dashboard, or Inventory → Trade-ins. Take the seller's name and a contact number. 2. **Record the device and inspect it**: Brand, model, storage, colour, IMEI or serial number: then the condition of the screen, the back, the camera, the port, and whether it is locked to an account. This is what your offer is based on. (A device still signed in to an account cannot be resold. Record it honestly here rather than discovering it at the counter later.) 3. **Make the offer**: Enter what you expect it to sell for and what it will cost to refurbish. The offer is what you are paying the seller, and the difference is visible before you commit. 4. **Approve and pay**: Approving fixes the offer. Recording the payment takes it out of the till, so the drawer and the day's takings agree. 5. **Put it on the shelf**: Add it to inventory and it becomes a device unit at the cost you paid, ready to sell. **The customer changed their mind** A trade-in that has not been paid can be cancelled. One already paid is a purchase you made, so it stays on the record.